 | ActionScript: The Definitive Guide |  |
The following entries document ActionScript's objects and classes. Refer to the index for the operators and statements covered elsewhere in this book.
| Arguments Object | access to function parameters and the current function |
Flash 5
arguments[elem] arguments.propertyName
A reference to the function being executed.
The number of parameters passed to the function being executed.
The Arguments object is stored in the local arguments variable of every function and is accessible only while a function is executing. Arguments is both an array and an object. As an array, arguments stores the values of the parameters passed to the currently executing function. For example, arguments[0] is the first passed parameter, arguments[1] is the second passed parameter, and so on. As an object, Arguments stores the callee property, which can be used to identify or invoke the current function.
"The arguments Object" in Chapter 9, "Functions"
| arguments.callee Property | a reference to the function being executed |
Flash 5
arguments.callee
Read/write
The callee property stores a reference to the function currently executing. We may use this reference to execute the current function again or to identify the current function through comparison.
function someFunction ( ) {
trace(arguments.callee == someFunction); // Displays: true
}
// An unnamed recursive function
countToTen = function ( ) {
i++;
trace(i);
if (i < 10) {
arguments.callee( );
}
};| arguments.length Property | the number of parameters passed to an argument |
Flash 5
arguments.length
Read/write
The length property stores an integer representing the number of elements in the arguments array, which equates to the number of parameters passed to the currently executing function.
We can use the length property of arguments to determine whether a function was invoked with the correct number of parameters. The following example checks whether two arguments have been passed to someFunction( ). Checking whether the passed arguments are of the correct type is left as an exercise to the reader. (Hint: see the typeof operator.) Here's the code:
function someFunction (y, z) {
if (arguments.length != 2) {
trace("Function invoked with wrong number of parameters");
return;
}
// Proceed with normal function body...
}| Array Class | support for ordered lists of data |
Flash 5
new Array() new Array(len) new Array(element0, element1, element2,...elementn)
A non-negative integer specifying the size of the new array.
A list of one or more initial values to be assigned as elements of the array.
The number of elements in an array (including empty elements).
Create a new array by appending additional elements to an existing array.
Convert an array to a string.
Remove and return the last element of an array.
Add one or more elements to the end of an array.
Reverse the order of elements in an array.
Remove and return the first element of an array.
Create a new array using a subset of elements from an existing array.
Sort the elements of an array according to the specified rule.
Remove elements from, and/or add elements to, an array.
Convert an array to a string of comma-separated element values.
Add one or more elements to the beginning of an array.
We use the properties and methods of the Array class to manipulate the data stored in the elements of an array object. See Chapter 11, "Arrays", for exhaustive details on what arrays are and how you can use them, plus detailed definitions of the terminology used in this section. See also the [] and . operators, which are used to access array elements as described in Chapter 5, "Operators".
If the Array constructor is invoked with a single integer argument, that argument is used to set the length of the new array, not the value of the first element. If two or more arguments are supplied to the constructor or if a single non-numeric argument is supplied to the constructor, the arguments are used as the initial values for elements in the array, and the length of the array is determined by the number of arguments specified.
| Array.concat( ) Method | create a new array by extending an existing array |
Flash 5
array.concat(value1, value2, value3,...valuen)
A list of expressions to be added to the end of array as new elements.
A new array containing all the elements of array followed by the elements value1,...valuen.
The concat( ) method returns a new array created by appending new elements to the end of an existing array. The original array is left unchanged. Use the push( ), splice( ), or shift( ) method to modify the original array.
If an array is used as an argument to concat( ), each element of that array is appended separately. That is, the result of arrayX.concat(arrayY) will be an array formed by appending each element of arrayY to the end of arrayX. The resulting array will have a length equal to arrayY.length + arrayX.length. Nested arrays, however, are not similarly flattened.
// Create an array
myListA = new Array("apples", "oranges");
// Set myListB to ["apples", "oranges", "bananas"]
myListB = myListA.concat("bananas");
// Create another new array
myListC = new Array("grapes", "plums");
// Set myListD to ["apples", "oranges", "bananas", "grapes", "plums"]
myListD = myListB.concat(myListC);
// Set myListA to ["apples", "oranges", "bananas"]
myListA = myListA.concat("bananas");
// Create an array
settings = ["on", "off"];
// Append an array containing a nested array
options = settings.concat(["brightness", ["high", "medium", "low"]]);
// Sets options to: ["on", "off", "brightness", ["high", "medium", "low"]]
// not: ["on", "off", "brightness", "high", "medium", "low"]Array.push( ), Array.shift( ), Array.splice( ); Section 11.7.3.4, "The concat( ) method" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.join( ) Method | convert an array to a string |
Flash 5
array.join() array.join(delimiter)
An optional string to be placed between elements in the newly created string. Defaults to a comma if not supplied.
A string composed of all the elements of array converted to strings and separated by delimiter.
The join( ) method returns a string created by combining all the elements of an array, as follows:
Convert each element in the array to a string (empty elements are converted to the empty string).
Add delimiter to the end of each converted-element string, except the last one.
Concatenate the converted-element strings into one long string.
Note that elements that are themselves arrays are converted to strings via the toString( ) method, so nested array elements are always delimited by commas, not the delimiter used in the join( ) invocation.
fruit = new Array("apples","oranges","bananas","grapes","plums");
// Set fruitString to "apples,oranges,bananas,grapes,plums"
fruitString = fruit.join( );
// Set fruitString to "apples-oranges-bananas-grapes-plums"
fruitString = fruit.join("-");Array.toString( ), String.split( ) ; Section 11.9.4, "The join( ) Method" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.length Property | the number of elements in an array |
Flash 5
array.length
Read/write
The length property is a non-negative integer specifying the number of elements in an array. An array with no elements has a length of 0, an array with 2 elements has a length of 2. Note that the index number of the first element in an array is 0, so length is always one greater than the index of the last element in the array.
The length property of an array indicates how many numbered elements the array currently contains, including empty elements (those containing null or undefined). For example, an array may have values for elements 0, 1, 2, and 9, but elements 3 through 8 may be empty. Such an array has a length of 10 because it has 10 element positions (0 through 9) even though only 4 positions are occupied by useful values.
Setting the length of an array changes the number of elements in the array. If we increase length, empty elements are added to the end of the array; if we decrease length, existing elements are removed from the end of the array. The length property changes automatically whenever any elements are added or removed via the Array class methods. The length property reflects numbered elements only; it does not include named array elements, which are treated as properties of the array.
myList = new Array("one", "two", "three");
trace(myList.length); // Displays: 3
// Loop through the array's elements
for (var i = 0; i < myList.length; i++) {
trace(myList[i]);
}"Determining the Size of an Array" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.pop( ) Method | remove the last element of an array |
Flash 5
array.pop()
The value of the last element of array, which is also deleted.
The pop( ) method deletes the last element of an array, reduces the array's length by 1, and returns the value of the deleted element. Compare with the shift( ) method, which deletes the first element of an array.
myList = new Array("one", "two", "three");
trace ("Now deleting " + myList.pop( )); // myList is now: ["one", "two"]Array.push( ), Array.shift( ), Array.splice( ); "Removing Elements from an Array" in Chapter 11, "Arrays", "The delete Operator" in Chapter 5, "Operators"
| Array.push( ) Method | add one or more elements to the end of an array |
Flash 5
array.push(value1, value2,...valuen)
A list of one or more values to be added to the end of array.
The new length of array.
The push( ) method appends a list of values to the end of an array as new elements. Elements are added in the order provided. It differs from concat( ) in that push( ) modifies the original array, whereas concat( ) creates a new array. It differs from unshift( ) in that it adds elements at the end of an array, not the beginning.
myList = new Array (5, 6); myList.push(7); // myList is now [5, 6, 7] myList.push(10, 8, 9); // myList is now [5, 6, 7, 10, 8, 9]
Array.concat( ), Array.pop( ), Array.unshift( ); "Adding Elements to an Array" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.reverse( ) Method | reverse the order of elements in an array |
Flash 5
array.reverse()
The reverse method reverses the order of elements in an array, swapping the last element with the first element, the second-to-last element with the second element, and so on.
myList = new Array(3, 4, 5, 6, 7); myList.reverse( ); // myList is now [7, 6, 5, 4, 3]
Array.sort( )
| Array.shift( ) Method | remove the first element of an array |
Flash 5
array.shift()
The value of the first element of array, which is also deleted.
The shift( ) method deletes the first element of an array and then moves all the remaining elements of the array up one position. The affected array's length is reduced by 1. Note that shift( ) differs from the pop( ) method, which deletes the last element of an array.
myList = new Array ("a", "b", "c");
myList.shift( ); // myList becomes ["b", "c"]Array.pop( ), Array.splice( ), Array.unshift( ); "Removing Elements from an Array" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.slice( ) Method | create a new array using a subset of elements from an existing array |
Flash 5
array.slice(startIndex, endIndex)
A zero-relative integer specifying the first element in array to add to the new array. If negative, startIndex indicates an element number counting backward from the end of array (-1 is the last element, -2 is the second-to-last element, etc.).
An integer specifying the element after the last element in array to add to the new array. If negative, endIndex counts backward from the end of array (-1 is the last element, -2 is the second-to-last element, etc.). If omitted, endIndex defaults to array.length.
A new array containing the elements of array from startIndex to endIndex-1.
The slice( ) method creates a new array by extracting a series of elements from an existing array. The new array is a subset of the elements of the original array, starting with array[startIndex] and ending with array[endIndex-1].
myList = new Array("a", "b", "c", "d", "e");
// Set myOtherList to ["b", "c", "d"]
myOtherList = myList.slice(1, 4);
// Set anotherList to ["d", "e"]
anotherList = myList.slice(3);
// Set yetAnotherList to ["c", "d"]
yetAnotherList = myList.slice(-3, -1);Array.splice( ); Section 11.9.3, "The slice( ) Method" in Chapter 11, "Arrays", Section 5.11.4, "The delete Operator" in Chapter 5, "Operators"
| Array.sort( ) Method | sort the elements of an array |
Flash 5
array.sort() array.sort(compareFunction)
A function that dictates how to sort array.
When invoked without any arguments, the sort( ) method temporarily converts the elements of array to strings and orders the elements according to the code points of those strings (approximately alphabetical order). Alphabetic comparisons and code points are described in "Character order and alphabetic comparisons" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes".
When invoked with a compareFunction argument, sort( ) reorders the elements of array according to the return value of compareFunction, which is a user-defined function that dictates how to arrange any two values in the array. Your user-defined compareFunction should be designed to accept two array elements as arguments. It should return a negative number if the first element should come before the second element; it should return a positive number if the first element should come after the second element; and it should return a if the elements should not be reordered. If additional elements are added to the array after it has been sorted, they are not added in sorted order. You must resort the array to reorder any newly added elements. Note that numbers are sorted according to their Latin 1 code points by default. Chapter 11, "Arrays" explains how to sort numbers by their numeric values.
The following example sorts an array of movie clips according to their horizontal location on screen:
var clips = [clip1, clip2, clip3, clip4];
function compareXposition (element1, element2) {
if (element1._x < element2._x) {
return -1;
} else if (element1._x > element2._x) {
return 1;
} else {
return 0; // The clips have the same x position
}
}
clips.sort(compareXposition);Array.reverse( ); "The sort( ) method" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.splice( ) Method | remove elements from, and/or add elements to, an array |
Flash 5
array.splice(startIndex) array.splice(startIndex, deleteCount) array.splice(startIndex, deleteCount, value1,...valuen)
The zero-relative element index at which to start element deletion and optional insertion of new elements. If negative, startIndex specifies an element counting back from the end of array (-1 is the last element, -2 is the second-to-last element, etc.).
An optional non-negative integer representing the number of elements to remove from array, including the element at startIndex. If 0, no elements are deleted. If omitted, all elements from startIndex to the end of the array are removed.
An optional list of one or more values to be added to array at index startIndex after the specified elements have been deleted.
A new array containing the deleted elements (the original array is modified separately to reflect the requested changes).
The splice( ) method removes the elements from array[startIndex] to array[startIndex + deleteCount-1] and then optionally inserts new elements starting at startIndex. The splice( ) method does not leaves gaps in array ; it moves elements up or down to ensure the contiguity of elements in the array.
myList = new Array (1, 2, 3, 4, 5); // Deletes the second and third elements from the list // and insert the elements "x", "y", and "z" in their place. // This changes myList to [1, "x", "y", "z", 4, 5]. myList.splice(1, 2, "x", "y", "z");
Array.slice( ); Section 11.8.3.3, "The splice( ) method" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Array.toString ( ) Method | convert an array to a string of comma-separated element values |
Flash 5
array.toString()
A comma-separated list of array 's elements converted to strings.
The toString( ) method creates a string representation of array. The string returned by toString( ) is a list of array elements converted to strings and separated by commas (the same as is returned by the join( ) method when join( ) is invoked without parameters). An array's toString( ) method is automatically invoked whenever the array is used in a string context. Therefore, it is rarely necessary to manually execute toString( ) on an array. Normally, when we want a precise string representation of an array, we use the join( ) method, which offers us more control over the string we're creating.
myList = new Array("a", "b", "c"); // Create an array
trace(myList.toString( )); // Displays: "a","b","c"
myList = new Array([1, 2, 3], "a", "b", "c"); // Create a nested array
trace(myList.toString( )); // Displays: "1,2,3,a,b,c"Array.join( )
| Array.unshift( ) Method | add one or more elements to the beginning of an array |
Flash 5
array.unshift(value1, value2,...valuen)
A list of one or more element values to be added to the beginning of array.
The new length of array.
The unshift( ) method adds a series of elements to the beginning of an array. Elements are added in the order specified. To add elements at the end of an array, use push( ) .
myList = new Array (5, 6); myList.unshift(4); // myList becomes [4, 5, 6] myList.unshift(7, 1); // myList becomes [7, 1, 4, 5, 6]
Array.push( ), Array.shift( ); Section 11.7, "Adding Elements to an Array" in Chapter 11, "Arrays"
| Boolean( ) Global Function | convert a value to the boolean datatype |
Flash 5
Boolean(value)
An expression containing the value to be converted to a Boolean.
The result of converting value to a primitive Boolean (either true or false).
The Boolean( ) global function converts its argument to a primitive Boolean value and returns that converted value. The results of converting various types of data to a primitive Boolean are described in Table 3-3. It's normally not necessary to use the Boolean( ) function; ActionScript automatically converts values to the boolean type when appropriate.
Be sure not to confuse the global Boolean( ) function with the Boolean class constructor. The Boolean( ) function converts its argument to the boolean datatype, whereas the Boolean class constructor creates a new Boolean object. Note that in ECMA-262, all nonempty strings convert to true. In Flash 5, only strings that can be converted to a valid nonzero number convert to true. Therefore, even the string "true" converts to the Boolean false.
var x = 1;
if (Boolean(x)) {
trace("x is true");
}The Boolean class; Section 3.4, "Datatype Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes"
| Boolean Class | wrapper class for primitive Boolean data |
Flash 5
new Boolean(value)
An expression to be resolved and, if necessary, converted to a Boolean value, then wrapped in a Boolean object.
Convert the value of a Boolean object to a string.
Retrieve the primitive value of a Boolean object.
The Boolean class creates a Boolean object which contains a primitive Boolean value in an inaccessible, internal property. Boolean objects are used purely for the sake of manipulating and examining primitive Boolean values using methods of the Boolean class. A Boolean object is, hence, known as a wrapper object because it simply packages a primitive Boolean value, giving it some object-like methods. Compare the Boolean class with the String and Number classes, which similarly wrap string and number primitive values, but with more useful results.
For the most part, Boolean objects are used internally. They are created automatically by the interpreter whenever a method is invoked on a primitive Boolean value and are deleted automatically after each use. We can create Boolean objects ourselves using the Boolean constructor, but there is seldom reason to do so.
Note that in practice it is much more common to use the Boolean( ) global function as a datatype-conversion tool than it is to use the Boolean class.
Boolean( ) global function; "The Boolean Type" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Boolean.toString( ) Method | the value of the Boolean object converted to a string |
Flash 5
booleanObject.toString()
The string "true" if the primitive value of booleanObject is true; "false" if the primitive value of booleanObject is false. The value of the Boolean object is specified when the object is constructed and stored internally thereafter. Although the internal value of a Boolean object is inaccessible, we can use toString( ) to convert it to its string equivalent.
The toString( ) method retrieves the primitive value of a Boolean object, converts that value to a string, and returns the resulting string.
x = new Boolean(true); trace(x.toString( )); // Displays: "true"
Object.toString( )
| Boolean.valueOf( ) Method | the primitive value of the Boolean object |
Flash 5
booleanObject.valueOf()
The Boolean value true if the primitive value of booleanObject is true; false if the primitive value of booleanObject is false. The value of the Boolean object is specified when the object is constructed and stored internally thereafter.
The valueOf( ) method returns the primitive Boolean datum associated with a Boolean object. Although the internal value of a Boolean object is inaccessible, we can use valueOf( ) to convert it to its primitive equivalent.
x = new Boolean(0); trace(x.valueOf( )); // Displays: false
Object.valueOf( )
| Call( ) Global Function | execute the script of a remote frame |
Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5
call(frameLabel) call(frameNumber)
A string representing the label of the frame whose script should be executed.
The number of the frame whose script should be executed.
The call( ) function executes the script attached to the frame at frameLabel or frameNumber. For example, the following code runs the script on frame 20 of the current timeline:
call(20);
In Flash 4, call( ) was used to create a crude kind of reusable subroutine (one that could not accept parameters or return any value). In Flash 5, the function statement is preferred.
Note that in Flash 5, when a script is executed remotely via call( ), any variables declared with the var keyword are considered local to that execution and expire after the script completes. To create nonlocal variables in a remotely-executed script, omit the var keyword:
var x = 10; // Local variable; dies after script completes x = 10; // Timeline variable; persists after script completes
To invoke call( ) on frames outside the current timeline, use the tellTarget( ) function. The following example executes the script on frame 10 of the box clip:
tellTarget ("box") {
call(10);
}Chapter 9, "Functions"; Appendix C, "Backward Compatibility"
| Color Class | control over movie clip color values |
new Color(target)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie clip or document level whose color will be controlled by the new object (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
Retrieve the current offset values for Red, Green, and Blue.
Retrieve the current offset and percentage values for Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha.
Assign new offset values for Red, Green, and Blue, while reducing percentage values to 0.
We use objects of the Color class to programmatically dictate the color and transparency of a movie clip or main movie. Once we've created an object of the Color class for a specific target, we can then invoke the methods of that object to affect its target's color and transparency. For example, suppose we have a clip instance named ball that we want to make red. We first make a Color object with a target of ball and store it in the variable ballColor. Then we use ballColor.setRGB( ) to assign ball the color red, as follows:
var ballColor = new Color("ball");
ballColor.setRGB(0xFF0000); // Pass setRGB( ) the hex value for redThe preceding example provides color control for simple applications. But to handle more complex scenarios, we need to know more about how color is represented in Flash. Every individual color displayed in a movie clip is defined by four separate components: Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha (or transparency). Those four components are combined in different amounts to generate each color we see on screen. The amount of Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha in a given color is described as a number between 0 and 255. The higher the value of Red, Green, or Blue, the more each of those colors contributes to the final color. However, remember that computer color is additive, not subtractive like paint, so higher values tend to be brighter, not darker. If all three RGB components are equal, the result is a shade of gray; if they are all 0, the result is black; if they are all 255, the result is white. The higher the value of Alpha, the more opaque the final color will be. (A color with an Alpha of is completely transparent, and a color with an Alpha of 255 is completely opaque.)
For example, pure red would be described by the following values:
Red: 255, Green: 0, Blue: 0, Alpha: 255
whereas a partially transparent red might have the values:
Red: 255, Green: 0, Blue: 0, Alpha: 130
For the purposes of this discussion, we adopt the so-called RGB triplet notation (Red, Green, Blue) when talking about color values. Although ActionScript doesn't support decimal RGB triplets such as (255, 0, 255), it does support the hexadecimal equivalent form 0xRRGGBB, where RR, GG, and BB are two-digit hex numbers representing Red, Green and Blue. We'll also adopt the RGBA quadlet notation (Red, Green, Blue, Alpha) for convenience only in the following discussion.
The initial Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha values for each color in a movie clip are set in the Flash authoring tool using the Mixer panel. (In the Mixer panel, Alpha is shown as a percentage, not a number from to 255.) To alter all the colors in a movie clip via ActionScript, we make universal adjustments (known as transformations ) to the Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha components of the clip's color.
We have two means of setting transformations for each color component:
We may set the percentage of the component's original value to a number between -100 and 100. For example, we may say "set all red used in this clip to 80% of its original value."
We may specify an amount to offset the component's original value. The offset is a number between -255 and 255. For example, we may say, "add 20 to all blue values in this clip," or, using a negative number we may say, "subtract 30 from all blue values in this clip."
The final value of a color in a transformed clip is determined by combining its original (author-time) color component values with the transformation percentages and offsets set through the Color object, as follows:
R = originalRedValue * (redTransformPercentage/100) + redTransformOffset G = originalGreenValue * (greenTransformPercentage/100) + greenTransformOffset B = originalBlueValue * (blueTransformPercentage/100) + blueTransformOffset A = originalAlphaValue * (alphaTransformPercentage/100) + alphaTransformOffset
If no transformations have been performed through ActionScript, the initial transformation percentage for each component defaults to 100, while the initial offset defaults to 0.
Let's look at how color transformations work with a practical example. Suppose that a clip contains an opaque red triangle (R:255, G:0, B:0, A:255) and an opaque green circle (R:0, G:255, B:0, A:255). Now further suppose that we apply a universal transformation to the clip, setting the percentage of Green to 50, the percentage of Alpha to 80, and the offset of Blue to 100 but leaving the other offsets and percentages at their defaults (0 or 100). Here's how the universal transformation affects our red triangle:
R == 255 * (100/100) + 0 == 255 // No change to Red G == 0 * (50/100) + 0 == 0 // Green reduced to 50% B == 0 * (100/100) + 100 == 100 // Blue offset by 100 A == 255 * (80/100) + 0 == 204 // Alpha reduced to 80%
The final transformed red triangle has the color value (R:255, G:0, B:100, A:204). Now here's how the transformation affects our green circle:
R == 0 * (100/100) + 0 == 0 // No change to Red G == 255 * (50/100) + 0 == 127.5 // Green reduced to 50% B == 0 * (100/100) + 100 == 100 // Blue offset by 100 A == 255 * (80/100) + 0 == 204 // Alpha reduced to 80%
The final transformed green circle has the color value (R:0, G:127.5, B:100, A:204).
To actually apply our hypothetical color transformations to a real clip, we use a Color object as we saw earlier. To set a clip's universal color offset and percentage values we use the setRGB( ) or the setTransform( ) methods (see the entries for those methods for example code). Conversely, to examine the current color transformations of a clip, we use the getRGB( ) and getTransform( ) methods. The Color class methods can produce animated color effects such as fade-ins, fade-outs, and tinting. Furthermore, because we can apply tints to each clip instance individually, the Color class provides a very efficient way to create diverse graphics with minimal assets. For example, we could create a scene full of balloons from a single movie clip that was colorized and tinted in myriad ways, as shown under the Example heading that follows.
Some points of interest for Color objects:
Changing the color of a movie clip with a Color object will break a tween and place the movie clip under ActionScript's control, meaning that some authoring-time behaviors applied to the clip may cease functioning.
Setting the _alpha property of a clip affects the clip's Alpha percentage as reflected by the aa property of the object returned by getTransform( ).
Color transformations do not affect the background color of a movie or a movie clip. They apply only to solid shapes placed on the Stage.
Manual color transformations may be applied to movie clips in the
authoring tool via the Effect panel (Window 
Panels
Effect). All such transformations are reflected in the properties of
the object returned by getTransform( ). The
Effect panel serves as an excellent tool for viewing and choosing
color transformations while authoring a movie.
The first example shows how to generate a series of randomly colored balloon movie clips based on an existing clip called balloon:
// Loop to make 20 duplicates of the clip balloon
for (var i = 0; i < 20; i++) {
// Duplicate this balloon
balloon.duplicateMovieClip("balloon" + i, i);
// Position this balloon on stage
this["balloon" + i]._x = Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 550);
this["balloon" + i]._y = Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 400);
// Create a Color object for this balloon
balloonColor = new Color(this["balloon" + i]);
// Randomly assign this balloon's color using the setRGB( ) method
balloonColor.setRGB(Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 0xFFFFFF));
}By setting the Red, Green, and Blue offsets to the same value, we can effectively brighten or darken a movie clip. For example, the following code darkens myClip:
brightness = new Color("myClip");
brightnessTransform = new Object( );
brightnessTransform.rb = -30;
brightnessTransform.bb = -30;
brightnessTransform.gb = -30;
brightness.setTransform(brightnessTransform);This last example contains code that brightens and darkens a clip according to the mouse position:
onClipEvent (load) {
var brightness = new Color(this);
var brightnessTransform = new Object( );
var stageWidth = 550;
}
onClipEvent (mouseMove) {
brightnessAmount = -255 + (_root._xmouse / stageWidth) * 510;
brightnessTransform.rb = brightnessAmount;
brightnessTransform.bb = brightnessAmount;
brightnessTransform.gb = brightnessAmount;
brightness.setTransform(brightnessTransform);
updateAfterEvent( );
}
| Color.getRGB( ) Method | retrieve the current offset values for Red, Green, and Blue |
Flash 5
colorObj.getRGB()
A number representing the current RGB offsets of colorObj 's target.
The getRGB( ) method returns a number ranging from -16777215 to 16777215 that represents the current color offsets for the Red, Green, and Blue components in a clip; to retrieve the color percentages, you must use getTransform( ). Because color offset values normally range from 0 to 255, it's convenient to work with the return value of getRGB( ) in hexadecimal, where each color offset can be represented by a two-digit hex number. To decipher the number returned by getRGB( ), we treat it as a six-digit hex number of the form 0xRRGGBB, where RR is the Red offset, GG is the Green offset, and BB is the Blue offset. For example, if getRGB( ) returns the number 10092339, we convert it to the hex number 0x99FF33 from which we derive the color offsets R:153, G:255, B:51. Or if getRGB( ) returns the number 255, we convert it to the hex number 0x0000FF from which we derive the color offsets R:0, G:0, B:255. The return value of getRGB( ) can be converted to hexadecimal with toString( ), as follows:
// Create a Color object
myColor = new Color("myClip");
// Set the Red offset to 255 (FF in hex)
myColor.setRGB(0xFF0000);
// Retrieve the RGB offset and convert it to hexadecimal
hexColor = myColor.getRGB( ).toString(16);
trace(hexColor); // Displays: ff0000Hexadecimal color values are familiar to most web developers, as they are often used in HTML tags. For example, here we use a hexadecimal number to specify the background color of a page (full values for red and blue combine to form pink):
<BODY BGCOLOR="#FF00FF">
The hex color format used in HTML tags is, in fact, the same as the format used by getRGB( ) and setRGB( ). However, it's not mandatory to use hexadecimal to interpret the return value of getRGB( ); we may also extract the individual Red, Green and Blue color offsets from the return value of getRGB( ) using the bitwise operators:
var rgb = myColorObject.getRGB( ); var red = (rgb >> 16) & 0xFF; // Isolate the Red offset and assign it to red var green = (rgb >> 8) & 0xFF; // Isolate the Green offset and assign it to green var blue = rgb & 0xFF; // Isolate the Blue offset and assign it to blue
With the offset values separated into individual variables, we may examine and manipulate them individually as decimal numbers. However, when we want to apply any offset value changes to a Color object, we must reassemble the offsets into a single number, as shown under the entry for the setRGB( ) method.
The getRGB( ) and setRGB( ) methods are convenient when we're directly assigning new colors to a clip without reference to the clip's original color values. However, the getTransform( ) and setTransform( ) methods are better suited to modifying the RGB components of a clip's color transformation in relation to the clip's original colors.
Color offsets are most easily read using getTransform( ), which returns each component separately rather than as a lump sum as getRGB( ) does. This is especially true when setting negative offsets with setTransform( ) due to the way that negative numbers are represented in binary.
// Create a new Color object for a clip named box
boxColor = new Color("box");
// Set a new RGB offset for "box"
boxColor.setRGB(0x333366);
// Check the RGB offset for "box"
trace(boxColor.getRGB( )); // Displays: 3355494Color.getTransform( ), Color.setRGB( )
| Color.getTransform( ) Method | retrieve both the current offset and percentage values for a clip's Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha components |
Flash 5
colorObj.getTransform()
An object whose properties contain the color transformation values for the target clip of colorObj.
The getTransform( ) method returns an object with properties that tell us which transformations are currently applied to the target of a Color object. The property names and values of the returned object are described in Table 20-4.
|
Property Name |
Property Value |
Property Description |
|---|---|---|
ra |
-100 to 100 |
The Red transformation percentage |
rb |
-255 to 255 |
The Red offset amount |
ga |
-100 to 100 |
The Green transformation percentage |
gb |
-255 to 255 |
The Green offset amount |
ba |
-100 to 100 |
The Blue transformation percentage |
bb |
-255 to 255 |
The Blue offset amount |
aa |
-100 to 100 |
The Alpha transformation percentage |
ab |
-255 to 255 |
The Alpha offset amount |
Note in Table 20-4 that both the percentage and the offset can have negative values; however, these are only one factor in calculating the RGB color components, which always range from 0 to 255. Values outside that range are clipped to the allowable range. See the Color class description for an explanation of the calculation used to determine final RGB and Alpha color components.
We can use getTransform( ) in combination with setTransform( ) to modify the Red, Green, Blue, or Alpha components of a color transformation individually. For example, in the following code, we adjust the Red and Alpha components of a clip named box:
// Create a new Color object for a clip named box
boxColor = new Color("box");
// Assign the return object of getTransform() to boxTransform
boxTransform = boxColor.getTransform( );
// Now, make some modifications to the transform object's properties
boxTransform.rb = 200; // Set Red offset to 200
boxTransform.aa = 60; // Set Alpha percentage to 60
// Apply the new transformations to box via boxColor
boxColor.setTransform(boxTransform);Color.setTransform( )
| Color.setRGB( ) Method | assign new offset values for Red, Green, and Blue |
Flash 5
colorObj.setRGB(offset);
A number in the range 0 to 16777215 (0xFFFFFF), representing the new RGB offsets of colorObj 's target clip. May be a decimal integer or a hexadecimal integer.
Numbers outside the allowed range are converted to numbers within the allowed range (using the rules of twos-complement binary notation). Therefore, setRGB( ) cannot be used to set negative offset values (as setTransform( ) can).
The setRGB( ) method assigns new transformation offsets for a movie clip's RGB components. The new offset is most easily specified as a six-digit hexadecimal number of the form 0xRRGGBB, where RR, GG, and BB are two-digit numbers between 00 and FF representing the Red, Green, and Blue components. For example, the RGB triplet (51, 51, 102) is equivalent to the hexadecimal value:
0x333366
Hence, to assign a gray RGB offset to a clip named menu, we could use:
var menuColor = new Color("menu");
menuColor.setRGB(0x999999);Web developers comfortable with six-digit hexadecimal color values in HTML will have an easy time using setRGB( ) using the preceding hexadecimal format. For a primer on decimal, octal, and hexadecimal numbers see http://www.moock.org/asdg/technotes.
Note that in addition to setting offsets, setRGB( ) also automatically sets the Red, Green, and Blue percentages of a clip's color transformation to 0, meaning that color changes performed via setRGB( ) behave as direct color assignments (not adjustments of the original colors in the clip). To adjust the color of a movie clip in relation to the clip's original colors, we must use the setTransform( ) method.
Here's a handy technique for generating a number to use with the setRGB( ) method. Our custom combineRGB( ) function shifts the red and green numbers into the proper position in a 24-bit number and then combines the red, green, and blue values using the bitwise OR operator (|). We use the result to assign a color value to the movie clip box:
function combineRGB (red, green, blue) {
// Combine the color values into a single number
var RGB = (red<<16) | (green<<8) | blue;
return RGB;
}
// Create the Color object
var boxColor = new Color("box");
// Set the color of box to the RGB triplet (201, 160, 21)
boxColor.setRGB(combineRGB(201, 160, 21));For more information on bitwise operations, see Chapter 15, "Advanced Topics".
Color.getRGB( ), Color.setTransform( )
| Color.setTransform( ) Method | assign new offset and/or percentage values for Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha |
Flash 5
colorObj.setTransform(transformObject)
An object whose properties contain the new color transformation values for the target clip of colorObj.
The setTransform( ) method gives us precise control over the percentage and offset of the Red, Green, Blue, and Alpha components of a movie clip's color. To use setTransform( ), we must first create an object with a series of predefined properties. The transformation we wish to apply to our Color object is expressed using those properties, which are listed in Table 20-4 for the getTransform( ) method (except that setTransform( ) specifies their values rather than reading their values).
Once we have created an object with the properties described in Table 20-4, we pass that object to the setTransform( ) method. The values of the properties on our transformObject become the new offset and percentage transform values of colorObj and, hence, colorObj's target movie clip. The final color values in the clip are then determined according to the calculation discussed under the Color class.
To examine the current offsets and percentages of a particular Color object, we use the getTransform( ) method.
// Create a new Color object for the box clip
boxColor = new Color("box");
// Create a new anonymous object and store it in boxTransform
boxTransform = new Object( );
// Assign the required properties of boxTransform, setting our
// transformation values as desired
boxTransform.ra = 50; // Red percentage
boxTransform.rb = 0; // Red offset
boxTransform.ga = 100; // Green percentage
boxTransform.gb = 25; // Green offset
boxTransform.ba = 100; // Blue percentage
boxTransform.bb = 0; // Blue offset
boxTransform.aa = 40; // Alpha percentage
boxTransform.ab = 0; // Alpha offset
// Now that our transform object has been
// prepared, pass it to setTransform( )
boxColor.setTransform(boxTransform);The preceding approach to creating a transform object is fairly labor-intensive. We may generate a new transform object more easily using the getTransform( ) method, as follows:
// Create a new Color object for the box clip
boxColor = new Color("box");
// Invoke getTransform( ) on boxColor, retrieving an appropriately
// constructed transform object
boxTransform = boxColor.getTransform( );
// Now alter only the desired properties of boxTransform,
// leaving the others unchanged
boxTransform.rb = 51; // Red offset
boxTransform.aa = 40; // Alpha percentage
// Use our transform object with setTransform( )
boxColor.setTransform(boxTransform);| Date( ) Global Function | a string representing the current date and time |
Flash 5
Date()
A string containing the current date and time.
The Date( ) function returns a human-readable string that expresses the current date and time relative to the local time zone. The string also includes the GMT offset (the number of hours difference between local time and Greenwich Mean Time).
Be sure not to confuse the global Date( ) function with the Date( ) class constructor. The Date( ) function returns the date formatted as a standard, if terse, string. It is convenient for humans but not very useful inside a program where you need to manipulate dates and times. For that purpose, you are better off using objects of the Date class, which allow convenient independent access to the year, month, day, and time.
To place the current time and date in a text field with minimal fuss, we can use the Date( ) function as follows:
myTextField = Date( ); // Sets myTextField to a string formatted as follows: // "Mon Aug 28 16:23:09 GMT-0400 2000"
The Date class, Date.UTC( )
| Date Class | current time and structured support for date information |
Flash 5
new Date() new Date(milliseconds) new Date(year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds, ms)
The number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight of January 1, 1970 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time, akin to GMT). Positive if after; negative if before. Any required local time zone adjustment is made after the date in UTC time is determined. For example, specifying a milliseconds argument of 1000 in Eastern Standard Time would create a date 1 second past midnight on January 1, 1970 in UTC time, which translates to 7:00:01 p.m. on December 31, 1969 in EST time (5 hours behind UTC time).
An integer specifying the year. Required when using the year,...ms constructor format. If year is one or two digits, it is treated as the number of years since 1900 (e.g., a year of 11 always refers to the year 1911, not 2011). Use four-digit numbers to specify year 2000 or later (e.g., use 2010, not 10). Three-digit years are treated as pre-1000 A.D. Note that when year is negative or less than 800, the calculation is unreliable. To specify dates prior to 1000 A.D., it's safest to use the single milliseconds constructor format.
An integer specifying the month, from ( January) to 11 (December), not from 1 to 12. Required when using the year,...ms constructor format. Out-of-range months are carried over to the next or previous year. For example, a month of 13 is treated as February of the following year.
An optional integer specifying the day, from 1 to 31. Defaults to 1 if not specified. Out-of-range days are carried over to the next or previous month. For example September 31 is treated as October 1 and September is treated as August 31.
An optional integer specifying the hour, from 0 (midnight) to 23 (11 p.m.). Defaults to if not specified. AM and PM notation are not supported. Out-of-range hours are carried over to the next or previous day. For example, an hour of 25 is treated as 1 a.m. of the following day.
An optional integer specifying the minute, from to 59. Defaults to if not specified. Out-of-range minutes are carried over to the next or previous hour. For example, a minute of 60 is treated as the first minute of the following hour.
An optional integer specifying the seconds, from to 59. Defaults to if not specified. Out-of-range seconds are carried over to the next or previous minute. For example, a second of -1 is treated as the last second of the previous minute.
An optional integer specifying the milliseconds, from to 999. Defaults to if not specified. Out-of-range milliseconds are carried over to the next or previous second. For example, an ms of 1005 is treated as 5 milliseconds into the following second.
Retrieve the number of milliseconds between January 1, 1970 and a supplied UTC date.
Retrieve the day of the month, from 1 to 31.
Retrieve the day of the week, as a number from 0 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday).
Retrieve the four-digit year.
Retrieve the hour of the day from 0 to 23.
Retrieve the milliseconds.
Retrieve the minutes.
Retrieve the month of the year, as a number from 0 (January) to 11 (December).
Retrieve the seconds.
Retrieve the date in internal format (i.e., the number of milliseconds between the date and January 1, 1970).
Retrieve the number of minutes between UTC and local time.
Retrieve the day of the month in UTC time.
Retrieve the day of the week in UTC time.
Retrieve the four-digit year in UTC time.
Retrieve the hour of the day in UTC time.
Retrieve the milliseconds in UTC time.
Retrieve the minutes in UTC time.
Retrieve the month of the year in UTC time.
Retrieve the seconds in UTC time.
Retrieve the year, relative to 1900.
Assign the day of the month.
Assign the year in four-digit format.
Assign the hour of the day.
Assign the milliseconds.
Assign the minutes.
Assign the month of the year.
Assign the seconds.
Assign the date in internal format (i.e., the number of milliseconds between the date and January 1, 1970).
Assign the day of the month in UTC time.
Assign the year in four-digit format in UTC time.
Assign the hour of the day in UTC time.
Assign the milliseconds in UTC time.
Assign the minutes in UTC time.
Assign the month of the year in UTC time.
Assign the seconds in UTC time.
Assign the year in four-digit, or in two-digit format for the 20th century.
A human-readable string representing the date.
The number of milliseconds between the date and midnight of January 1, 1970 UTC.
We use objects of the Date class as a mechanism by which to determine the current time and date and as a means of storing arbitrary dates and times in a structured format.
In ActionScript, a specific date is represented by the number of milliseconds before or after midnight of January 1, 1970. If the number of milliseconds is positive, the date comes after midnight, January 1, 1970; if the number of milliseconds is negative, the date comes before midnight, January 1, 1970. For example, if a date value is 10000, the date being described is 12:00:10, January 1, 1970. If a date value is -10000, the date being described is 11:59:50, December 31, 1969.
Normally, however, we needn't worry about calculating the number of milliseconds to a particular date; the ActionScript interpreter takes care of that for us. When we construct a Date object, we simply describe our date as a year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and millisecond. The interpreter then converts that point in time to the internal milliseconds-from-1970 format. We may also ask the interpreter to create a new Date object using the current time. Once a Date object is created, we can use the Date class's methods to retrieve and set the date's year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and millisecond.
There are three ways to make a new Date object:
We may invoke the Date( ) constructor with no arguments. This sets the new Date object to the current time.
We may invoke the Date( ) constructor with one numeric argument: the number of milliseconds between midnight, January 1, 1970 and the date we're creating.
We may invoke the Date( ) constructor with from two to seven numeric arguments, corresponding to the year and month (mandatory) and (optionally) the day, hour, minute, second, and millisecond of the date we're creating.
Because dates are stored internally as a single number, objects of the Date class do not have properties to retrieve and set. Rather, they have methods that we use to access the various components of a date in human-readable terms (i.e., in more convenient units). For example, to determine the month of a particular Date object, we use:
myMonth = myDate.getMonth( );
We cannot use:
myMonth = myDate.month; // There's no such property! We have to use methods.
Many Date methods contain the letters "UTC," which is an abbreviation for Coordinated Universal Time. For most purposes, UTC time is directly synonymous with the more colloquial Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT -- the time as measured on the Greenwich meridian. UTC is simply a newer standard that is less ambiguous than GMT, which has had several meanings over history. The UTC methods allow us to work with times directly in Coordinated Universal Time without converting between time zones. The equivalent non-UTC methods all generate values based on local, adjusted time zones.
All dates and times are determined according to the settings on the operating system on which the Flash movie is running (not the web server) and include regional offsets. Times and dates, therefore, are only as accurate as the user's system.
Note that the Date( ) constructor may also be used as a global function to generate a string expressing the current time in the same format as would be returned by myDate.toString( ).
In Flash 5 ActionScript, it is not possible to convert a string into a Date object, as is possible in JavaScript.
Dates can be added and subtracted to come up with cumulative times or elapsed times. Suppose our friend Graham decides to go traveling for a little less than a year. While he's gone, we want to keep track of how many days he's been away and how many days we have to wait for him to return. The following code takes care of our countdown:
// Assign the current time to now var now = new Date( ); // Graham leaves September 7, 2000 (remember, months start at 0 // so September is 8, not 9) var departs = new Date(2000,8,7); // Graham comes back August 15, 2001 var returns = new Date(2001,7,15); // Convert the times to milliseconds for easy comparison. // Then check how many milliseconds have elapsed between the two times. var gone = now.getTime() - departs.getTime( ); // Divide the difference between departure date and now by the number // of milliseconds in a day. This tells us how many days we've been waiting. var numDaysGone = Math.floor(gone/86400000); // Use the same technique to determine how many days we have left to wait var left = returns.getTime() - now.getTime( ); var numDaysLeft = Math.floor(left/86400000); // Display our days in text fields goneOutput = numDaysGone; leftOutput = numDaysLeft;
When adding a day to, or subtracting a day from, an existing date, we normally assign the number of milliseconds in a day (86400000) to a variable for convenient use. The following code adds one day to the current date:
oneDay = 86400000; now = new Date( ); tomorrow = new Date(now.getTime( ) + oneDay); // We could also add one day to the date in now like this now.setTime(now.getTime( ) + oneDay);
To apply custom formatting to a date, we must manually map the return values of getDate( ), getDay( ), getHours( ), and so on to custom strings as shown in the following example:
// Takes any Date object and returns a string of the format:
// Saturday December 16
function formatDate(theDate) {
var months = ["January", "February", "March", "April",
"May", "June", "July", "August", "September",
"October", "November", "December"];
var days = ["Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday", "Thursday",
"Friday", "Saturday"];
var dateString = days[theDate.getDay( )] + " "
+ months[theDate.getMonth( )] + " "
+ theDate.getDate( );
return dateString;
}
now = new Date( );
trace("Today is " + formatDate(now));The next example shows how to convert the 24-hour clock return value of getHours( ) to a 12-hour clock with AM and PM:
// Takes any Date object and returns a string of the format:
// "2:04PM"
function formatTime(theDate) {
var hour = theDate.getHours( );
var minute = theDate.getMinutes( ) > 9 ?
theDate.getMinutes() : "0" + theDate.getMinutes( );
if (hour > 12) {
var timeString = (hour - 12) + ":" + minute + "PM";
} else {
var timeString = hour + ":" + minute + "AM";
}
return timeString;
}
now = new Date( );
trace("The time is " + formatTime(now));For an example using the Date class to create an analog-style clock, see Section 13.9.1, "Building a Clock with Clips" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips". Note that programming time-based behavior such as a 10-second pause in a movie is often accomplished more easily with the global getTimer( ) function.
| Date.getDate( ) Method | the day of the month |
Flash 5
date.getDate()
An integer from 1 to 31, representing the day of the month for date.
| Date.getDay( ) Method | the day of the week |
Flash 5
date.getDay()
An integer from 0 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday), representing the day of the week for date.
The following code loads a .swf file specific to the current day of the week into the movie clip welcomeHeader (the seven .swf files are named in the series sun.swf, mon.swf, and so on):
now = new Date( ); today = now.getDay( ); days = ["sun", "mon", "tue", "wed", "thu", "fri", "sat"]; welcomeHeader.loadMovie(days[today] + ".swf");
| Date.getFullYear( ) Method | the four-digit year |
Flash 5
date.getFullYear()
A four-digit integer representing the year for date, for example 1999 or 2000.
| Date.getHours( ) Method | the hour of the day |
Flash 5
date.getHours()
An integer from 0 (midnight) to 23 (11 p.m.) representing the hour of the day for date. A.M. and P.M. notation are not supported but can be constructed manually as shown in the Date class examples.
| Date.getMilliseconds( ) Method | the milliseconds of a date |
Flash 5
date.getMilliseconds()
An integer from 0 to 999 representing the milliseconds of date. Note that it does not represent the milliseconds from 1970 (see getTime( )), but rather the fractional remainder of the seconds indicated by the specified Date object.
Date.getTime( )
| Date.getMinutes( ) Method | the minutes of a date |
Flash 5
date.getMinutes()
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the minutes of the hour of date.
| Date.getMonth( ) Method | the month of the year |
Flash 5
date.getMonth()
An integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not 1 to 12, representing the month of the year of date.
Be careful not to assume that 1 is January! The return value of getMonth( ) starts at 0, not 1.
Here we convert the number returned by getMonth( ) to a human-readable abbreviation:
var months = ["Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun",
"Jul", "Aug", "Sept", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"];
myDateObj = new Date( );
trace ("The month is " + months[myDateObj.getMonth( )]);| Date.getSeconds( ) Method | the seconds of a date |
Flash 5
date.getSeconds()
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the seconds of the minute of date.
| Date.getTime( ) Method | retrieve the number of milliseconds between January 1, 1970 and the time of a date object |
Flash 5
date.getTime()
An integer expressing the number of milliseconds between the time of date and midnight, January 1, 1970. Positive if after January 1, 1970; negative if before.
Internally, all dates are represented as a single number -- the number of milliseconds between the time of the date and midnight, January 1, 1970. The getTime( ) method gives us access to that number of milliseconds so that we may use it to construct other dates or to compare the elapsed time between two dates.
Suppose we place the following code on the 10th frame of a movie:
time1 = new Date( );
Then we place the following code on the 20th frame of a movie:
time2 = new Date( );
With the following code, we can determine the amount of time that elapsed, in milliseconds, between the 10th and 20th frames of our movie:
elapsedTime = time2.getTime() - time1.getTime( );
Note that Flash's global getTimer( ) function also gives us access to elapsed time in a movie.
Date.setTime( ), getTimer( )
| Date.getTimezoneOffset( ) Method | the number of minutes between local time and UTC (a.k.a. GMT) |
Flash 5
date.getTimezoneOffset()
An integer representing the current number of minutes between the local time zone and the actual UTC (Greenwich meridian) time. Positive if local time is behind UTC; negative if local time is ahead of UTC. Includes adjustments for local daylight saving time depending on the day of the year.
When invoked in Eastern Daylight Time (EDT) during daylight savings, the following code returns the value 240 (240 minutes is 4 hours):
myDate = new Date( ); trace(myDate.getTimezoneOffset( )); // Displays: 240
However, when invoked in EDT, during non-daylight savings times of year, the same code returns 300 (300 minutes is 5 hours), which is the real offset between Eastern Standard Time (EST) and UTC.
| Date.getUTCDate( ) Method | the day of the month (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCDate()
An integer from 1 to 31, representing the day of the month for date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getUTCDay( ) Method | the day of the week (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCDay()
An integer from 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday), representing the day of the week for date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getUTCFullYear( ) Method | the four-digit year (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCFullYear()
A four-digit integer representing the year for date, where date is treated as a UTC time, for example 1999 or 2000.
| Date.getUTCHours( ) Method | the hour of the day (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCHours()
An integer from 0 (midnight) to 23 (11 p.m.) representing the hour of the day for date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getUTCMilliseconds( ) Method | the milliseconds of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCMilliseconds()
An integer from 0 to 999 representing the milliseconds of date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getUTCMinutes( ) Method | the minutes of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCMinutes()
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the minutes of the hour of date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getUTCMonth( ) Method | the month of the year (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCMonth()
An integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not 1 to 12, representing the month of the year of date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
Be careful not to assume that 1 is January! The return value of getUTCMonth( ) starts at 0, not 1.
| Date.getUTCSeconds( ) Method | the seconds of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.getUTCSeconds()
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the seconds of the minute of date, where date is treated as a UTC time.
| Date.getYear( ) Method | the year, relative to 1900 |
Flash 5
date.getYear()
The value of date.getFullYear( ) -1900. For example, getYear( ) of 1999 is 99, getYear( ) of 2001 is 101, and getYear( ) of 1800 is -100. This function is most useful for dates in the 20th century.
| Date.setDate( ) Method | assign the day of the month |
Flash 5
date.setDate(day)
An integer from 1 to 31, representing the new day of the month for date. If you specify a day greater than the number of days in the current month, it will cause the month to increment accordingly. For example, if the current month is 8 (September) and you specify 31 for the new day, it will be treated as October 1. The day will become 1 and the month will become 9 (October).
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.getDate( )
| Date.setFullYear( ) Method | assign the century and year in four-digit format |
Flash 5
date.setFullYear(year, month, day)
A four-digit integer representing the new year for date, for example 1999 or 2000.
An optional integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not 1 to 12, representing the new month of the year of date. Defaults to if not specified.
An optional integer from 1 to 31 representing the new day of the month of date. Defaults to 1 if not specified.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.setYear( ), Date.getFullYear( )
| Date.setHours( ) Method | assign the hour of the day |
Flash 5
date.setHours(hour)
An integer from 0 (midnight) to 23 (11 p.m.) specifying the new hour of the day for date.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.getHours( )
| Date.setMilliseconds( ) Method | assign the milliseconds of a date |
Flash 5
date.setMilliseconds(ms)
An integer from 0 to 999 representing the new milliseconds of date not the number of milliseconds since 1970. Values above 999 or below are carried over to the seconds of date .
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.getMilliseconds( ), Date.setTime( )
| Date.setMinutes( ) Method | assign the minutes of a date |
Flash 5
date.setMinutes(minute)
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the new minutes of the hour of date . Values above 59 or below 0 are carried over to the hours of date .
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.getMinutes( )
| Date.setMonth( ) Method | assign the month of the year |
Flash 5
date.setMonth(month)
An integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not from 1 to 12, representing the new month of the year of date. Values above 11 or below are carried over to the year of date .
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Be careful not to assume that 1 is January! Months start at 0, not 1.
Date.getMonth( )
| Date.setSeconds( ) Method | assign the seconds of a date |
Flash 5
date.setSeconds(second)
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the new seconds of the minute of date . Values above 59 or below 0 are carried over to the minutes of date .
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
Date.getSeconds( )
| Date.setTime( ) Method | assign a new date based on the number of milliseconds between January 1, 1970 and the new date |
Flash 5
Date.setTime(milliseconds)
An integer expressing the number of milliseconds between the new desired date and midnight, January 1, 1970. Positive if after January 1, 1970; negative if before.
The value of milliseconds.
Internally, all dates are represented as the number of milliseconds between the time of the date and midnight, January 1, 1970. The setTime( ) method specifies a new date using the internal millisecond representation. Setting a date using milliseconds from 1970 is often handy when we're determining differences between multiple dates and times using getTime( ).
Using setTime( ) in concert with getTime( ) we can adjust the time of an existing date by adding or subtracting milliseconds. For example, here we add one hour to a date:
now = new Date( ); now.setTime(now.getTime( ) + 3600000);
And here we add one day:
now = new Date( ); now.setTime(now.getTime( ) + 86400000);
To improve the readability of our code, we create variables representing the number of milliseconds in an hour and milliseconds in a day:
oneDay = 86400000; oneHour = 3600000; now = new Date( ); // Subtract one day and three hours. now.setTime(now.getTime( ) - oneDay - (3 * oneHour));
Date.getTime( ), Date.setMilliseconds( ), Date.UTC( ), getTimer( )
| Date.setUTCDate( ) Method | assign the day of the month (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCDate(day)
An integer from 1 to 31, representing the new day of the month for date in UTC time. If you specify a day greater than the number of days in the current month, it will cause the month to increment accordingly. For example, if the current month is 8 (September) and you specify 31 for the new day, it will be treated as October 1. The day will become 1 and the month will become 9 (October).
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setUTCFullYear( ) Method | assign the century and year infour-digit format (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCFullYear(year)
A four-digit integer representing the new year for date in UTC time, for example 1999 or 2000.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setUTCHours( ) Method | assign the hour of the day (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCHours(hour)
An integer from 0 (midnight) to 23 (11 p.m.) representing the new hour of the day for date in UTC time.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setUTCMilliseconds( ) Method | assign the milliseconds of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCMilliseconds(ms)
An integer from 0 to 999 representing the new milliseconds of date in UTC time.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setUTCMinutes( ) Method | assign the minutes of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCMinutes(minute)
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the new minutes of the hour of date in UTC time.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setUTCMonth( ) Method | assign the month of the year (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCMonth(month)
An integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not from 1 to 12, representing the new month of the year of date in UTC time.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
Be careful not to assume that 1 is January! Months start at 0, not 1.
| Date.setUTCSeconds( ) Method | assign the seconds of a date (UTC time) |
Flash 5
date.setUTCSeconds(second)
An integer from 0 to 59 representing the new seconds of the minute of date in UTC time.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970 in UTC time.
| Date.setYear( ) Method | assign the year, relative to 1900 |
Flash 5
date.setYear(year, month, day)
A required integer specifying the new year of date . If one or two digits are supplied, the year is assumed to be in the 20th century. For example, 1 is the year 1901, and 99 is the year 1999. Three-digit years are assumed to be pre-1000 A.D. Use four digits to specify the year 2000 and later.
An optional integer from 0 (January) to 11 (December), not from 1 to 12, representing the new month of the year of date.
An optional integer from 1 to 31 representing the new day of the month of date.
An integer representing the number of milliseconds between the new date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
setYear( ) is identical to setFullYear( ) except that it interprets one- and two-digit years as being relative to 1900 whereas setFullYear( ) interprets them as being relative to 0 A.D.
Date.getYear( ), Date.setFullYear( )
| Date.toString( ) Method | a human-readable string representing the date |
Flash 5
date.toString()
A string giving the current time and date of date in human-readable format, including the UTC (GMT) offset. To compose customized representations of the date, use the methods for retrieving the day, hours, minutes, and so on, and map those values onto your own strings, as shown earlier in the example under Date class.
trace (myDate.toString( )); // Displays a date in the format:
// Wed Sep 15 12:11:33 GMT-0400 1999| Date.UTC( ) Class Method | retrieve the number of milliseconds between January 1, 1970 and a supplied UTC date |
Flash 5
Date.UTC(year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds, ms)
A series of numeric values describing the date and time but supplied in UTC time, not local time. For descriptions of each argument see the Date( ) constructor.
The number of milliseconds between the specified date and midnight, January 1, 1970.
The Date.UTC( ) method takes the same arguments as the Date( ) constructor, but instead of returning an object for the specified date, Date.UTC( ) returns a number indicating the date in the internal milliseconds-from-1970 format. The returned number is typically used to construct a new Date object in UTC or to assign a UTC time to an existing Date object via the setTime( ) method.
The following code shows how to measure the milliseconds elapsed between midnight 1970 and midnight 2000 in UTC time:
trace(Date.UTC(2000, 0) + " milliseconds passed between 1970 and 2000."); // Displays: "946684800000 milliseconds passed between 1970 and 2000."
Here we use those elapsed milliseconds to construct a UTC-time-based Date object:
nowUTC = new Date(Date.UTC(2000, 0));
If that code were invoked in EST (Eastern Standard Time), which is 5 hours behind UTC, nowUTC would represent the local time 7p.m. on December 31, 1999. When we check the hour using the non-UTC method getHours( ), we get the local hour, 19 (7p.m. in a 24-hour clock):
trace(nowUTC.getHours( )); // Displays: 19
But when we check the hour using the UTC method getUTCHours( ), we get the correct UTC hour, (midnight in a 24-hour clock):
trace(nowUTC.getUTCHours( )); // Displays: 0
Date( ), Date.setTime( ), the Date class
| Date.valueOf( ) Method | the number of milliseconds between January 1, 1970 and the time of the Date object |
Flash 5
date.valueOf()
An integer expressing the number of milliseconds between the time of the Date object and midnight, January 1, 1970. Positive if after January 1, 1970; negative if before.
In practice, Date.valueOf( ) is equivalent to Date.getTime( ).
Date.toString( )
| duplicateMovieClip( ) Global Function | create a copy of a movie clip |
duplicateMovieClip(target, newName, depth)
A string indicating the path to the movie clip to duplicate (known as the seed clip ). Nested clips may be referred to with dot syntax, as in duplicateMovieClip("_root.myClip", "myClip2", 0). Because a movie clip reference is converted to a path when used in a string context, target may also be a movie clip object reference, as in duplicateMovieClip(myClip, "myClip2", 0).
A string that will become the instance name of the duplicated clip. The string used must adhere to the rules for creating an identifier outlined in Section 14.5, "Identifiers" in Chapter 14, "Lexical Structure".
An integer indicating the level in the programmatic clip stack on which to place the duplicated clip. Clips on lower levels are placed visually behind clips on higher levels. The movie clip with the highest depth in a stack obscures all the clips below it. For example, a clip on depth -1 appears behind a clip on depth 0, which appears behind a clip on depth 1. If the assigned depth is occupied, the occupant clip is removed, and the new duplicate takes its place. See Chapter 13, "Movie Clips" for additional details. Negative depths are functional, but not officially supported by ActionScript; to ensure future compatibility, use depths of 0 or greater.
The duplicateMovieClip( ) function is one way to create a new movie clip during movie playback (the other is attachMovie( )). duplicateMovieClip( ) creates an identical copy of target and places the copy in target's clip stack on layer depth. The duplicated clip begins playing at frame 1 no matter what the frame of target is when duplication occurs.
A duplicated clip inherits any transformations (rotation, scale, etc.) that had been applied to target but does not inherit the timeline variables of target. The global function duplicateMovieClip( ) is also available as a movie clip method, though when used in that form, the target argument is not used.
// Copies the ball clip and names the copy ball2 duplicateMovieClip(ball, "ball2", 0); // Moves the new ball2 clip over so we can see it ball2._x += 100;
MovieClip.duplicateMovieClip( ), removeMovieClip( ); Section 13.3.2.2, "Creating instances with duplicateMovieClip( )", Section 13.4.2.2, "How clips generated via duplicateMovieClip( ) are added to the stack", and Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| escape( ) Global Function | encode a string for safe network transfer |
Flash 5
escape(string)
A string (or an expression that yields a string) to be encoded.
An (almost) URL-encoded version of string.
The escape( ) function creates a new encoded string based on a supplied string. The new string contains a hexadecimal escape sequence in place of any character in the supplied string that is not a digit or a basic, unaccented Latin letter between A and Z or a and z. The replacement hexadecimal escape sequences take the format %xx, where xx is the hexadecimal value of the character's code point in the Latin 1 character set. Shift-JIS double-byte characters are converted to two hexadecimal escape sequences of the form %xx%xx.
The escape( ) function effectively URL-encodes a string, except that space characters are converted to %20, not +. escape( ) is sometimes used when a Flash movie sends information to server applications or writes cookies in a browser.
To decode an encoded string, we use the global unescape( ) function.
var phoneNumber = "(222) 515-1212" escape(phoneNumber); // yields %28222%29%20515%2D1212
unescape( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes"
| eval( ) Global Function | convert a string to an identifier |
Flash 4 and later
eval(stringExpression)
A string or an expression that yields a string. Should match the name of some identifier.
The value of the variable represented by stringExpression or a reference to the object, movie clip, or function represented by stringExpression. If stringExpression does not represent a variable or a movie clip, undefined is returned.
The eval( ) function provides a means of constructing a dynamic reference to an identifier based on a string of text. eval( ) converts a string to a variable, movie clip, object property, or other identifier and then evaluates that identifier. For example, here we use the return value of eval( ) to set the value of a variable:
name1 = "Kathy";
count = 1;
currentName = eval("name" + count); // Sets currentName to "Kathy"And here we control a dynamically-named movie clip, star1:
eval("star" + count)._x += 100; // Move star1 right 100 pixelsBut we may also use an eval( ) invocation in place of an identifier that is the lefthand operand of an assignment expression, as in:
eval("name" + count) = "Simone"; // Sets name1 to "Simone"Note that, unlike its JavaScript cousin, eval( ) in ActionScript does not allow for the compiling and execution of arbitrary blocks of code in a string. Full support of eval( ) would require an ActionScript compiler in the Player, which would cause too great an increase in the Player size.
As of Flash 5, eval( ) is rarely needed for dynamic variable access. When managing multiple pieces of data, use arrays and objects instead.
The eval( ) function is often used to convert the MovieClip._droptarget string property to a movie clip object reference. In the following example, suppose we have a series of cartoon face clips. When the user drops a food clip onto one of the faces, we retrieve the path to the face in question using _droptarget, then we use eval( ) to retrieve an object reference to that face. Finally, we send the face to a frame showing the mouth full of food:
// Convert _droptarget string to a reference
theFace = eval(food._droptarget);
// Control appropriate face clip using converted reference
theFace.gotoAndStop("full");See Section 4.6.10, "Executing Code in a String with eval" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| _focusrect Global Property | the highlight state used for buttons activated via the keyboard |
Flash 4 and later
_focusrect
Read/write
When the mouse hovers over a button in Flash, the content of the button's Over state is displayed. Buttons can also gain keyboard focus when the user presses the Tab key. When a button has keyboard focus, Flash places a yellow rectangle over that button, which is not always aesthetically desirable. You can turn off the yellow highlight rectangle using the _focusrect global property, like so:
_focusrect = false;
When _focusrect is set to false, Flash displays the Over state of keyboard-focused buttons. When _focusrect is set to true (its default), Flash displays the yellow rectangle.
Though _focusrect is used in a Boolean sense, it actually stores a number, not a Boolean. Although there's rarely a reason to do so, if we examine the value of _focusrect, it returns either 1 (indicating true) or (indicating false).
| fscommand( ) Global Function | send a message to the standalone Player or to the Player's host application |
Flash 3 and later (enhanced in Flash 5 to include trapallkeys)
fscommand(command, arguments)
A string passed to the host application, often the name of a JavaScript function.
A string passed to the host application, often an argument to the function named by command.
With the fscommand( ) function, a Flash movie can communicate with the standalone Player or with the Player's host application -- the environment in which the Flash Player is running (e.g., a web browser or Macromedia Director). The fscommand( ) function is typically used in one of three ways:
To send one of a limited set of built-in commands to the standalone Flash Player
To send commands to a scripting language such as JavaScript or VBScript in a web browser
When used with the standalone Player, fscommand( ) takes one of the built-in sets of command /argument pairs, as shown in Table 20-5.
|
Command |
Argument |
Description |
|---|---|---|
|
"true" or "false" |
When "false", prevents the contents of a movie from growing or shrinking in relation to the window size of the Player. "allowscale" is often used in combination with "fullscreen" to create a Projector that occupies the entire screen while maintaining the movie's original size. |
|
|
"application_name" |
Launches an external application. The path to the application is specified in the string application_name. The path is resolved relative to the Flash movie unless application_name is specified as an absolute path such as: "C:/WINDOWS/NOTEPAD.EXE". Note that the path uses forward slashes ( / ), not backslashes ( \ ). |
|
|
"true" or "false" |
When "true", causes the Player window to maximize, filling the user's entire screen. |
|
|
not applicable |
Closes the movie and exits the Flash projector (standalone Player). |
|
|
"true" or "false" |
When "false", suppresses the display of the controls in the context menu of the Player, leaving only the About Macromedia Flash Player option. The context menu is accessed via right-click on Windows and Ctrl-click on Macintosh. |
|
|
"true" or "false" |
When "true", causes all keystrokes -- even keyboard shortcuts -- to be sent to the Flash movie. trapallkeys is used to disable the control keys in the standalone Player (e.g., Ctrl-F or Command-F for Full Screen mode, Ctrl-Q or Command-Q for Exit, Esc for Stop/exit Full Screen mode, etc.). Added to fscommand in Flash 5. |
When used in a browser, the execution of an fscommand( ) function in a movie causes the invocation of a special JavaScript function (Netscape) or VBScript function (Internet Explorer) on the page that contains the movie. The name of this special function takes the general form movieID_DoFSCommand where movieID is the name specified in the movie's OBJECT ID attribute (Internet Explorer) or EMBED NAME attribute (Netscape) from the host HTML document. When movieID_DoFSCommand( ) is invoked, the values of the fscommand( ) 's command and arguments parameters are passed to the movieID_DoFSCommand( ) function as arguments. If no movieID_DoFSCommand( ) function exists in the host page, fscommand( ) fails silently.
Note that in order for fscommand( ) to work with Netscape, the swLiveConnect attribute of the movie's EMBED tag must be set to "true". For example:
<EMBED NAME="testmovie" SRC="myMovie.swf" WIDTH="100%" HEIGHT="100%" swLiveConnect="true" PLUGINSPAGE="http://www.macromedia.com/go/flashplayer/" </EMBED>
It is not possible to communicate with a browser via fscommand( ) under the following system configurations:
Internet Explorer on the Macintosh OS
Any browser running on a 68K-series Macintosh
Any browser running on Windows 3.1
Netscape 6
Note that fscommand( ) does not always provide the best means of communicating with a Director movie from Flash. The preferred director communication device is a getURL( ) function with either the event: or lingo: protocol. For details, see the getURL( ) function or the following Macromedia tech notes:
http://www.macromedia.com/support/director/ts/documents/flash_xtra_sending_events.htm
http://www.macromedia.com/support/director/ts/documents/flash_xtra_lingo.htm
http://www.macromedia.com/support/director/ts/documents/flash_tips.htm
To quit a standalone Projector, use:
fscommand("quit");To create a standalone Projector that runs fullscreen, use:
fscommand("fullscreen", "true");To create a standalone Projector that runs fullscreen but maintains the original movie's size, use:
fscommand("fullscreen", "true");
fscommand("allowscale", "false");For information on launching a movie in a fullscreen web browser window, see http://www.moock.org/webdesign/flash/launchwindow/fullscreen.
To launch Notepad on most Windows systems, use:
fscommand("exec", "C:/WINDOWS/NOTEPAD.EXE");The following code shows an HTML page with the JavaScript and VBScript needed to respond to a simple fscommand( ) from a movie. Notice that the VBScript function simply calls the JavaScript function; this allows us to handle both Internet Explorer and Netscape with a single JavaScript function:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>fscommand demo</TITLE>
<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
<!--
function testmovie_DoFSCommand(command, args) {
alert("Here's the Flash message " + command + ", " + args);
}
//-->
</SCRIPT>
<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="VBScript">
<!--
Sub testmovie_FSCommand(ByVal command, ByVal args)
call testmovie_DoFSCommand(command, args)
end sub
//-->
</SCRIPT>
</HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF">
<OBJECT
ID="testmovie"
CLASSID="clsid:D27CDB6E-AE6D-11cf-96B8-444553540000"
WIDTH="100%"
HEIGHT="100%"
CODEBASE="http://download.macromedia.com/pub/shockwave/cabs/flash/swflash.cab">
<PARAM NAME="MOVIE" VALUE="flash-to-javascript.swf">
<EMBED
NAME="testmovie"
SRC="flash-to-javascript.swf"
WIDTH="100%"
HEIGHT="100%"
swLiveConnect="true"
PLUGINSPAGE="http://www.macromedia.com/go/flashplayer/"
</EMBED>
</OBJECT>
</BODY>
</HTML>To invoke the preceding testmovie_DoFSCommand( ) JavaScript function from the flash-to-javascript.swf movie, we'd use:
fscommand("hello", "world");For more information on fscommand( ) and controlling Flash with JavaScript, see:
http://www.macromedia.com/support/flash/publishexport/scriptingwithflash
| getProperty( ) Global Function | retrieve the value of a movie clip property |
Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5
getProperty(movieClip, property)
An expression that yields a string indicating the path to a movie clip. In Flash 5, this may also be a movie clip reference because movie clip references are converted to paths when used in a string context.
The name of the built-in property to retrieve. Must be an identifier, not a string (e.g., _x, not "_x").
The value of movieClip's property.
The getProperty( ) function retrieves the value of one of a movie clip's built-in properties. Though getProperty( ) was the only way to access object properties in Flash 4, the . and [] operators are the preferred property-access tools in Flash 5 and later.
Each of the following getProperty( ) invocations retrieve the values of the _x property of a movie clip named ball on the main movie timeline:
getProperty(ball, _x); // Relative movie clip reference
getProperty(_root.ball, _x); // Absolute movie clip reference
getProperty("ball", _x); // Relative path in string
getProperty("_root.ball", _x); // Dot path in string
getProperty("/ball", _x); // Slash path in stringThe following code shows similar property access using the dot and [ ] operators:
ball._x; _root.ball._x; ball["_x"]; _root["ball"]["_x"];
setProperty( ) ; Section 13.1, "The "Objectness" of Movie Clips" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| getTimer( ) Global Function | determine the age of a movie, in milliseconds |
Flash 4 and later
getTimer()
The number of milliseconds that have passed since the movie started playing.
The getTimer( ) function indicates how long a movie has been playing, in milliseconds. We can use multiple getTimer( ) checks to govern the timed execution of a block of code or to add time-based features to a movie, such as a countdown in a video game. For example, when attached to a movie clip that contains a text field named counterOutput, the following code counts down from 60 to 0:
onClipEvent (load) {
// Record the current time
var startTime = getTimer( );
// Set the number of seconds to count down
var countAmount = 60;
// Initialize a variable to keep track of how much time has passed
var elapsed = 0;
}
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
// Check how much time has passed
elapsed = getTimer( ) - startTime;
// If the time passed is less than the length of our countdown...
if (elapsed < countAmount * 1000) {
// ...set the text field to show the amount of time left
counterOutput = countAmount - Math.floor(elapsed / 1000);
} else {
// ...otherwise, our countdown is done, so tell the user
counterOutput = "Time's UP!";
}
}To determine the number of full seconds that have passed in a movie (rather than milliseconds), divide the return of getTimer( ) by 1000 and trim off the decimal portion with either Math.floor( ), Math.round( ), or Math.ceil( ). For example:
numSeconds = Math.floor(getTimer( )/1000);
The following code loops between two frames until a movie is more than 10 seconds old and then plays the movie:
now = getTimer( );
if (now > 10000) {
play( );
} else {
gotoAndPlay(_currentframe - 1);
}Date( ), the Date class
| getURL( ) Global Function | load a document into a browser, execute server-sidescripts, or trigger Macromedia Director events |
Flash 2 and Flash 3; enhanced in Flash 4 to include method parameter; Flash 5
getURL (URL) getURL (URL, window) getURL (URL, window, method)
A string specifying the absolute or relative location of the document to load or external script to run.
An optional string specifying the name of the browser window or frame into which to load the document. May be a custom name or one of the four presets: "_blank", "_parent", "_self", or "_top".
An optional string specifying the method by which to send the current timeline's variables to an external script -- either "GET" or "POST". This parameter must be a literal string, not a variable or other expression. The standalone version of the Flash Player always uses the "GET" method, regardless of the method specified.
The getURL( ) function is used to:
Load a document (usually a web page) into a web browser frame or window
Execute a server-side script and receive the results in a browser frame or window
Execute JavaScript code in a web browser
Trigger events from Flash assets imported as sprites into Director
To load a document into the current window or frame, simply specify the URL of the document without supplying a window or method argument. Naturally, Flash supports absolute URLs (those that contain a protocol such as "http:" plus a server name or hardware device) and relative URLs (those that are relative to the current location):
getURL("http://www.moock.org/"); // Absolute URL to web page
getURL("file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/index.html"); // Absolute URL to local file
getURL("/whatever/index.html"); // Relative URL, http protocol
//is assumedTo load a document into a named window or frame, supply the window or frame name as the window argument. For example:
getURL("http://www.moock.org/", "contentFrame"); // Load into named frame
getURL("http://www.moock.org/", "remoteWin"); // Load into named windowTo replace the frameset that contains the current movie, use "_ parent" as the value of the window argument. For example:
getURL("http://www.moock.org/", "_parent");To replace all framesets in a web page with a loaded document, use "_top" as the value of the window argument. For example:
getURL("http://www.moock.org/", "_top");To open a loaded document in a new, anonymous browser window, use "_blank" as the value of the window argument. For example:
getURL("http://www.moock.org/", "_blank");Note that launching a new window with "_blank" does not give us any control over the appearance of the new window (size, toolbar configuration, location, etc.). To launch customized windows with getURL( ), we must invoke a JavaScript function on the movie's host page. JavaScript window-launching techniques are described at http://www.moock.org/webdesign/flash.
The getURL( ) function may also be used to send variables to a remote server application or script. To send the current movie clip's timeline variables to an external script, specify the name of the script as the URL argument, and use either "GET" or "POST" as the value of the method argument. For example:
getURL("http://www.someserver.com/cgi-bin/search.pl", "resultsFrame", "GET");When invoked as a movie clip method, getURL( ) sends the timeline variables of that clip, as in:
// Sends myClip's variables to search.pl
myClip.getURL("http://www.server.com/cgi-bin/search.pl", "resultsFrame", "GET");The results of the script execution will appear in the window or frame specified in the getURL( ) 's window argument (which is required when variables are submitted).
To load the results of a script execution into the current frame or window, use "_self" as the window argument value, as in:
getURL("http://www.someserver.com/cgi-bin/search.pl", "_self", "GET");When the method argument is "GET", the current movie clip timeline variables are sent as a query string attached to the script URL in an HTTP GET request. Query strings are composed of variable name/value pairs, separated by ampersands (&). For example:
http://www.someserver.com/cgi-bin/search.pl?term=javascript&scope=entiresite
When the method argument is "POST", the current movie clip timeline variables are sent to the script as a separate block of data after the HTTP POST-request header (exactly like a regular HTML form that uses the POST method). Note that "POST" is not available in the standalone Flash Player.
Because most web servers restrict the length of URLs to between 255 and 1024 characters, use "POST" instead of "GET" to transfer larger amounts of data.
Note that any returned information sent by a script invoked by getURL( ) is displayed as regular web content in the browser, not in Flash. To accept the results of a script execution into Flash, use loadVariables( ).
The getURL( ) function can also be used with protocols other than "http:" as shown in Table 20-6.
|
Protocol |
Format |
Purpose |
|---|---|---|
|
"event: eventName params" |
Send an event to Director if the Flash asset is a Director sprite. |
|
|
"file:///driveSpec/folder/filename" |
Access a local file. |
|
|
"ftp://server.domain.com/folder/filename" |
Access a remote file via FTP (file transfer protocol). |
|
|
"http://server.domain.com/folder/filename" |
Access remote file via HTTP (hypertext transfer protocol). |
|
|
"javascript: command " |
Perform JavaScript command in browser. |
|
|
"lingo: comand " |
Perform Lingo command if Flash asset is a Director sprite. |
|
|
"print:", "targetClip " |
Prints in Flash 4, prior to the availability of the print( ) function in Flash 5. |
|
|
"vbscript: command " |
Perform VBScript command in browser. |
As Table 20-6 shows, if the Flash asset is imported into a Macromedia Director file, getURL( ) can be used to trigger Lingo events or execute a Lingo command. (Lingo is Director's scripting language, akin to ActionScript). For example, you can add a frame event of this form:
getURL ("event: eventName params");which will cause the Lingo event handler named on eventName to be called in Director. Here is a getURL( ) statement that generates an event named "myEvent" and passes it the string "A". Note that the " character is escaped using the sequence \":
getURL ("event: myEvent \"A\""); // Send an event to DirectorHere is the Lingo sprite event handler that should be attached to the Flash sprite asset in Director in order to receive the event. Note that a Director sprite is roughly equivalent to a Flash movie clip instance; the Lingo keyword put is akin to ActionScript's trace( ) command, and && is Lingo's string concatenation operator:
on myEvent msg put "The message received from Flash was " && msg end
You can also trigger Lingo to be executed from a Flash sprite within Director using the "lingo:" keyword, such as:
getURL ("lingo: beep"); // Tell Director to play a beep soundNote that Director 8.0 cannot import Flash 5 .swf files, but an updated Flash asset Xtra is expected to be available by the time you read this.
Finally, getURL( ) can also be used to execute JavaScript code. Here we invoke a simple JavaScript alert using getURL( ):
getURL ("javascript: alert('hello world');");Note that execution of JavaScript code from a URL does not work in Internet Explorer 4.5 for Macintosh.
Here's the code for a standard button that links to a web page:
on (release) {
getURL("http://www.macromedia.com/");
}Internet Explorer 4.5 (IE 4.5) and older versions on Macintosh do not support the "POST" method of a getURL( ) call. To service those browsers, use "GET" instead of "POST" (subject to the length limitations cited earlier).
In most browsers, getURL( ) relative links are resolved relative to the HTML file that contains the .swf file. In IE 4.5 and older versions on Macintosh, relative links are resolved relative to the location of the .swf file, not the HTML file, which causes problems when the two are in different directories. To avoid the problem, either place the .swf and the .html file in the same directory or use absolute URLs when invoking getURL( ), such as:
getURL ("http://www.someserver.com/")loadVariables( ), MovieClip.getURL( ), movieClip.loadVariables( ); Section 18.5.7, "< A> (Anchor or Hypertext Link)" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields"
| getVersion( ) Global Function | examine the platform and version of the Flash Player |
Flash 5
getVersion()
A string containing version and platform information for the Flash Player hosting the current movie.
The getVersion( ) function tells us the platform and Flash Player version being used to view a movie. It can be used to conditionally execute different code for specific versions of the Flash Player or on certain operating systems. The string returned by getVersion( ) takes the form:
platform majorVersion,minorVersion,buildNumber,patch
Where platform is a code indicating the platform ("WIN", "MAC", or "UNIX"), followed by the major version number, the minor version number, and the build (a.k.a. revision) number. The last item, patch, is typically 0. For example:
WIN 5,0,30,0 // Version 5.0, Build 30 (5.0r30) on Windows MAC 5,0,41,0 // Version 5.0, Build 41 (5.0r41) on Macintosh UNIX 4,0,12,0 // Version 4.0, Build 12 (4.0r12) on Unix
Despite the Macromedia documentation's claim to the contrary, getVersion( ) does work in the Flash authoring tool's Test Movie mode. It reports the version number of the Player embedded in the authoring tool (which is not the same as the version of the authoring tool itself). For example, the Flash 5 authoring tool embeds the 5.0 r30 version of the Player, so its getVersion( ) function reports:
WIN 5,0,30,0 or MAC 5,0,30,0
Any time a major or minor version of the authoring tool is created, the buildNumber restarts at 0. However, in the typical development cycle of the Flash authoring tool, many builds of the Flash Player are produced before the final version of the authoring tool is released. The build number of the first new major version of a Player is, hence, usually greater than 0. For example, the Flash 5 Player was first officially released at Build 30. Presumably, when Flash 6 is introduced, the Flash 6 Player will return something like:
WIN 6,0,xx,0
but if a movie created in Flash 6 is played back in the Flash 5 Player, getVersion( ) would still return:
WIN 5,0,30,0
Typically, we're concerned with only the platform, the major version, and the build number of a Player. To extract the portion of the getVersion( ) string we're after, we may use the string manipulation tools described in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes", or we may construct a custom object with each component of the getVersion( ) string assigned to a property of that object as shown in the next example.
Unless we need to produce internal blocks of ActionScript code for a specific version of the Flash Player, JavaScript and VBScript provide better tools for version detection, browser sniffing, and automatic page redirection. Furthermore, you can't use getVersion( ) unless the user already has version 5.0 or later of the Player. For details on detecting the Flash Player's presence and version with JavaScript and VBScript, see http://www.moock.org/webdesign/flash/detection/moockfpi.
The following code extracts the various portions of the string returned by getVersion( ) and stores them as the properties of an object for easy access:
// Split up the getVersion( ) string into usable pieces
var version = getVersion( );
var firstSpace = version.indexOf(" ");
var tempString = version.substring(firstSpace + 1, version.length);
var tempArray = tempString.split(",");
// Assign the various parts of the getVersion( ) string to our object.
// Note that we convert the version number portions to integers.
var thePlayer = new Object( );
thePlayer.platform = version.substring(0,firstSpace);
thePlayer.majorVersion = parseInt(tempArray[0]);
thePlayer.minorVersion = parseInt(tempArray[1]);
thePlayer.build = parseInt(tempArray[2]);
thePlayer.patch = parseInt(tempArray[3]);
// Now use our object to perform version-specific code
if (thePlayer.platform == "WIN") {
// Perform Windows-specific code here.
} else if (thePlayer.platform == "MAC") {
// Perform Mac-specific code here.
} else if (thePlayer.platform == "UNIX") {
// Perform Unix-specific code here.
}
if ((thePlayer.majorVersion == 5) && (thePlayer.build == 30)) {
trace ("I recommend upgrading your player to avoid text display bugs");
}$version; Appendix C, "Backward Compatibility"
| gotoAndPlay( ) Global Function | move the playhead to a given frame, then play the current clip or movie |
Flash 2 and later
gotoAndPlay(frameNumber) gotoAndPlay(frameLabel) gotoAndPlay(scene, frameNumber) gotoAndPlay(scene, frameLabel)
A positive integer indicating the number of the frame to which the playhead of the current timeline should proceed before playing. If frameNumber is less than 1 or greater than the number of frames in the timeline, the playhead is sent to either the first or last frame, respectively.
A string indicating the label of the frame to which the playhead of the current timeline should proceed before playing. If frameLabel is not found, the playhead is sent to the first frame of the timeline.
An optional string indicating the name of the scene that contains the specified frameNumber or frameLabel. If not supplied, the current scene is assumed.
When invoked without a scene argument, gotoAndPlay( ) sends the playhead of the current timeline to the frame specified by either the frameNumber or frameLabel and then plays the timeline from that point. The "current timeline" is the movie clip or movie from which the gotoAndPlay( ) function is invoked.
If two arguments are specified in the gotoAndPlay( ) function call, the first argument is assumed to be the scene. If only one argument is specified, it is treated as a frameNumber or frameLabel, and the current scene is assumed.
When invoked with a scene argument, gotoAndPlay( ) moves the playhead to the frame number or label in the specified scene and then plays that scene. If a scene argument is used, the gotoAndPlay( ) function must be invoked from the _root timeline; otherwise, the operation fails silently and the playhead is not sent to the destination frame. Note that scenes are flattened into a single timeline during movie playback. That is, if scene 1's timeline contains 20 frames, and scene 2's timeline contains 10 frames, then we can send the playhead to frame 5 of scene 2 using gotoAndPlay(25);.
TIP
I recommend against using scenes when working with ActionScript-intensive movies. Unlike movie clips, scenes are not represented by objects and cannot be manipulated directly by most built-in functions. It's normally better to use labels and movie clips as pseudo-scenes in your timeline instead of Flash's scene feature.
The global gotoAndPlay( ) function affects only the current timeline. The frames or state of other movie clips within the current timeline are not affected. To cause other movie clips to play, you must issue a separate play( ) or gotoAndPlay( ) command for each movie clip. To apply the gotoAndPlay( ) function to a clip other than the current movie clip, use the movie clip method form, myClip.gotoAndPlay( ).
In Build 5.0r30 of the Flash Player, gotoAndPlay( ) did not work when used in an onClipEvent( ) handler with a string literal for frameLabel. To work around the bug, use the movie clip variation of the function using this to indicate the current clip, as in this.gotoAndPlay("myLabel"), rather than gotoAndPlay("myLabel").
// Go to frame 5 of the current timeline and play it
gotoAndPlay(5);
// Go to frame 10 of the exitSequence scene, and play it
gotoAndPlay("exitSequence", 10);
// Go to frame "goodbye" of the exitSequence scene, and play it
gotoAndPlay("exitSequence", "goodbye");
// Caution! This plays the frame labeled "exitSequence" in the current scene.
gotoAndPlay("exitSequence");
// This plays frame 1 of the exitSequence scene
gotoAndPlay("exitSequence", 1);gotoAndStop( ), MovieClip.gotoAndPlay( ), play( ), stop( )
| gotoAndStop( ) Global Function | move the playhead to a given frame and stop the current clip |
Flash 2 and later
gotoAndStop(frameNumber) gotoAndStop(frameLabel) gotoAndStop(scene, frameNumber) gotoAndStop(scene, frameLabel)
A positive integer indicating the number of the frame to which the playhead of the current timeline should proceed. If frameNumber is less than 1 or greater than the number of frames in the timeline, the playhead is sent to either the first or last frame, respectively.
A string indicating the label of the frame to which the playhead of the current timeline should proceed. If frameLabel is not found, the playhead is sent to the first frame of the timeline.
An optional string indicating the name of the scene that contains the specified frameNumber or frameLabel. If not supplied, the current scene is assumed.
When invoked without a scene argument, gotoAndStop( ) sends the playhead of the current timeline to the frame specified by either the frameNumber or frameLabel argument. The "current timeline" is the movie or movie clip from which the gotoAndStop( ) function is invoked. The playhead will stop at the target frame; it will not advance automatically after arriving at the target frame.
If two arguments are specified in the gotoAndStop( ) function call, the first argument is assumed to be the scene. If only one argument is specified, it is treated as a frameNumber or frameLabel, and the current scene is assumed.
When invoked with a scene argument, gotoAndStop( ) moves the playhead to the frame number or label in the specified scene and then halts playback. If a scene argument is used, the gotoAndStop( ) function must be invoked from the _root timeline; otherwise, the operation fails silently and the playhead is not sent to the destination frame.
The global gotoAndStop( ) function affects only the current timeline. The frames or state of other movie clips within the current timeline are not affected. To move the playhead of other movie clips, you must issue a separate gotoAndStop( ) command for each movie clip. To apply the gotoAndStop( ) function to a clip besides the current movie clip, use the movie clip method of the form myClip.gotoAndStop( ).
In Build 5.0r30 of the Flash 5 Player, gotoAndStop( ) did not work when used in an onClipEvent( ) handler with a string literal for frameLabel. To work around the bug, use the movie clip variation of the function using this to indicate the current clip, as in this.gotoAndStop("myLabel"), rather than gotoAndStop("myLabel").
// Go to frame 5 of the current timeline and stop there
gotoAndStop(5);
// Go to frame 20 of the introSequence scene and stop there
gotoAndStop("introSequence", 20);
// Go to frame "hello" of the introSequence scene, and stop there
gotoAndStop("introSequence", "hello")
// Caution! This goes to the frame labeled "introSequence" in the current scene
gotoAndStop("introSequence")
// This goes to frame 1 of the introSequence scene
gotoAndStop("introSequence", 1)| _highquality Global Property | the rendering quality of the Player |
Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of _quality
_highquality
Read/write
The _highquality global property stores an integer between 0 and 2 that dictates the rendering quality of the Flash Player as follows:
Low quality. Neither bitmaps nor vectors are antialiased (smoothed).
High quality. Vectors are antialiased. Bitmaps are antialiased when no animation is occurring.
Best quality. Both bitmaps and vectors are always antialiased.
As of Flash 5, _highquality has been superseded by _quality, which may be used to set a movie's quality to "Medium", as well as "Low", "High", and "Best".
_quality, toggleHighQuality( )
| #include Directive | import the text of an external ActionScript file |
Flash 5
#include path
A string indicating the name and location of the script file to import, which may be specified relative to the .fla file or as an absolute path (see samples under Example). Note that forward slashes, not backslashes should be used in the path. Script files should be named with the .as file extension.
The #include directive brings script text from an external text file (preferably one with the .as extension) into the current script, placing it directly where the #include command occurs in the script. The #include operation is performed at compile time, meaning that the text included in a movie is the text that existed at the time the movie was tested, exported, or published from the authoring tool. If the external file changes after the movie is exported, the changes will not be reflected in the movie. In order for the changes to be added to the movie, the movie must be re-exported.
The #include directive is used to incorporate the same block of code in multiple scripts or across Flash projects (much as you'd use an external asset library). You would do this in order to centralize your code, when maintaining code in a version-control system tool (such as CVS or Microsoft Visual Source Safe), or when using an external text editor that you prefer over the ActionScript editor. It is also handy when a programmer is working separately from, say, a graphic artist creating the Flash animations. External files lend themselves well to code repositories, such as a library of functions that are independent of the current timeline or movie clip. They tend to be less useful for code that needs to be tightly integrated with the Flash file.
Note that an #include directive begins with a pound sign (#), does not use parentheses, and must not end in a semicolon. Any #include statements that end in a semicolon will cause an error and will not successfully import an external script. If the file can't be found at the specified path, the directive will cause an error and no external text will be included. The text in the external file is also checked when performing a syntax check using the Check Syntax command (Ctrl-T or Command-T) in the Actions panel menu (found under the arrow button in the upper-right corner of the panel).
The following code imports an external .as file named myScript.as into the current .fla file. When using a relative path, myScript.as would have to be in the same folder as the .fla file containing the include directive:
#include "myScript.as"
We can construct a relative path including a subdirectory. The following assumes that myScript.as is one level down from the current .fla file in a subdirectory named includes:
#include "includes/myScript.as"
Use two dots to indicate the folder above the current folder. The following assumes that myScript.as is one level up from the current .fla file:
#include "../myScript.as"
The following assumes that myScript.as is in a subdirectory named includes adjacent to the subdirectory containing the current .fla file:
#include "../includes/myScript.as"
You can also specify an absolute path to any folder, such as:
#include "C:/WINDOWS/Desktop/myScript.as"
but absolute paths are not cross-platform and may need to be changed if you compile the .fla file on a different machine with different directories. Note the differences in the drive letter specification:
#include "C:/WINDOWS/Desktop/myScript.as" // Windows #include "Mac HD:Desktop folder:working:myScript.as" // Macintosh
See Section 16.7, "Externalizing ActionScript Code" in Chapter 16, "ActionScript Authoring Environment"
| Infinity Global Property | a constant representing an infinite number |
Flash 5
Infinity
Read-only
Any number in ActionScript that exceeds the maximum allowed numeric range is represented by the numeric constant Infinity. The largest value allowed in ActionScript is represented by Number.MAX_VALUE (1.7976931348623157e+308).
The result of a calculation that exceeds the largest allowed number is Infinity. For example:
Number.MAX_VALUE * 2; // Yields Infinity
Infinity also results when dividing a positive number by zero:
1000 / 0; // Yields Infinity
Infinity is shorthand for Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY.
-Infinity, Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| -Infinity Global Property | a constant representing an infinitely negative number |
Flash 5
-Infinity
Read-only
Any number in ActionScript that exceeds the allowed negative numeric range is represented by the numeric constant -Infinity. The smallest negative value (the one with the largest absolute value) allowed in ActionScript is -Number.MAX_VALUE, which is equivalent to -1.7976931348623157e+308.
The result of a calculation that is smaller than (i.e., more negative than) the smallest allowed negative number is -Infinity. For example:
-Number.MAX_VALUE * 2; // Yields -Infinity
-Infinity also results when dividing a negative number by zero:
-1000 / 0; // yields -Infinity
-Infinity is shorthand for Number.NEGATIVE_INFINITY.
Infinity, Number.NEGATIVE_INFINITY; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| int( ) Global Function | truncate the decimal portion of a number |
Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of analogous Math methods
int(number)
A number or an expression that yields a number, typically a number with a fractional (decimal) portion.
The integer portion of number.
The int( ) function was used in Flash 4 as a brute-force means of extracting the integer portion of a number. It effectively rounds positive numbers down and rounds negative numbers up. The int( ) function works only for numbers in the range -2147483648 (-231) to 2147483647 (231-1); it produces undefined results for numbers outside this range. If number is a string composed of only numbers, int( ) converts the string to a number before operating on it. If number is the Boolean value true, int( ) returns the value 1. For all other non-numeric data (including undefined and null), int( ) returns the value 0.
The int( ) function has been deprecated in favor of the more precise and standard Math.floor( ), Math.ceil( ), and Math.round( ) methods. Use parseInt( ) or Number( ) to convert non-numeric data to an integer or number.
int(4.5) // Yields 4 int(-4.5) // Yields -4 int(3.999) // Yields 3
The int( ) function is useful to check if a number is a whole number by comparing the original number to the result of the int( ) function:
if (int(x) != x) {
trace ("Please enter a whole number for your age in years");
}Math.ceil( ), Math.floor( ), Math.round( ), Number( ), parseFloat( ), parseInt( )
| isFinite( ) Global Function | check if a number is less than Infinity and greater than -Infinity |
Flash 5
isFinite(number)
Any numeric value or expression that yields a numeric value.
A Boolean value; true if the number falls between Number.MAX_VALUE and -Number.MAX_VALUE (inclusive), false if not. If number does not belong to the number datatype, number is converted to the number type before isFinite( ) executes.
The isFinite( ) function simply checks if a number is in the legal numeric value range of ActionScript. Use isFinite( ) before executing code that requires a legitimate number to operate properly.
if (!isFinite(x * y)) { // Test if the number is not finite
trace ("The answer is too large to display. Try again.");
}
isFinite(-2342434); // Yields true
isFinite(Math.PI); // Yields true
isFinite(Number.MAX_VALUE * 2) // Yields false-Infinity, Infinity, isNan( ), Number.MAX_VALUE, Number.MIN_VALUE; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| isNaN( ) Global Function | equality test for the special NaN value |
Flash 5
isNaN(value)
The expression to test.
A Boolean value: true if value is the special numeric value NaN; otherwise, false.
To test whether or not a value is equal to the special numeric value NaN, we must use the isNaN( ) function because NaN does not test equal to itself in an ordinary equality test. For example, the expression:
NaN == NaN;
yields the value false. The isNaN( ) function is often used to check whether a mathematical error (such as zero divided by itself) has occurred in a phrase of code or whether converting a value to a legitimate number has failed. Because isNaN( ) returns true when the expression is not a valid numeric expression, you'll often use the logical NOT operator (!) along with isNaN( ) (something that is not not a number is a number). Note that 0/0 yields NaN, but all positive numbers divided by yield Infinity, and all negative numbers divided by yield -Infinity.
// Set a value
var x = "test123";
// Check if x is a legitimate number before using it is in a math expression.
// This is a handy technique for user input in text fields, which always a string.
if (!isNaN(parseFloat(x))) {
var y = parseFloat(x) * 2;
}isFinite( ), NaN; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Key Object | determine the state of keys on the keyboard |
Flash 5
Key.propertyKey.methodName()
Table 20-7 lists the properties of the Key object.
|
Equivalent Keycode |
Equivalent Keycode |
||
|---|---|---|---|
|
8 |
45 |
||
|
20 |
37 |
||
|
17 |
34 |
||
|
46 |
33 |
||
|
40 |
39 |
||
|
35 |
16 |
||
|
13 |
32 |
||
|
27 |
9 |
||
|
36 |
38 |
Returns the ASCII value of the last key pressed
Returns the keycode of the last key pressed
Checks if a specific key is currently depressed
Checks if the Num Lock, Caps Lock, or Scroll Lock keys are activated
The Key object is used to determine which keys are currently depressed and which key was last depressed. We can use it to build interfaces controlled by the keyboard, such as a game with a spaceship moved via the arrow keys.
Because not all keyboards are identical, keyboard-controlled interfaces can sometimes be tricky to create. By choosing our scripting tools correctly, however, we can ensure that all users have the same experience.
There are two general approaches to detecting keyboard commands:
We may check if a key is currently depressed via the isDown( ) method. This is recommended for cases in which keyboard input is constantly required, such as in video games.
We may check which key was last depressed using the getCode( ) and getAscii( ) methods. This is recommended for typical keyboard-driven interfaces in which specific operations are performed when keys are pressed. You would ordinarily use these methods within a keyDown event handler in order to distinguish between different keys. There is no need to constantly check (i.e., poll) for the last key pressed. In fact, doing so would lead to erroneously repeating some operation even if a key wasn't pressed repeatedly. That is, you should generally check getCode( ) and getAscii( ) within a keyDown event handler only because the handler is guaranteed to be called once and only once for each keystroke.
The so-called Windows virtual keycode (or simply, keycode) returned by getCode( ) and required by isDown( ) is a number representing the physical keys on the keyboard, not the symbols on those keys. By using the keycode, we can identify keys even when a movie is running on different operating systems or when two keyboards use different languages or have different symbol layouts.
On most keyboards the keycodes of the keys A to Z are the same as the code points (65-90) for the equivalent uppercase Latin 1 letters. The keycodes of the keys to 9 are, likewise, the same as the Latin 1 values for those numbers (48-57). The key codes of other keys do not match Latin 1 code points. However, many of the non-letter and non-number keycodes are available as properties of Key. For example, we don't have to remember that the up arrow uses keycode 38, we simply use the Key.UP property. The following code checks whether the up arrow key is currently depressed:
if (Key.isDown(Key.UP)) {
trace("The up arrow is being pressed");
}When working with a keycode that is not a letter or a number and is not available as a property of Key -- such as those of the function keys (F1, F2, etc.) -- it's safest to create a quick test movie to check the keycode of the desired key, as follows:
trace(Key.getCode( ));
The keycodes are listed in Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes".
Section 10.11.5, "keyUp" and Section 10.11.4, "keyDown" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers", and Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes"
| Key.getAscii( ) Method | returns the ASCII value of the last key pressed |
Flash 5
Key.getAscii()
An integer representing the ASCII value of the last key pressed.
The getAscii( ) method returns the ASCII value of the last key that was pressed. Since not all keys have an ASCII value, getAscii( ) is normally used for detecting letters and numbers from the Latin 1 character set (Western European languages). Unlike getCode( ), getAscii( ) distinguishes between upper- and lowercase letters. But unlike getCode( ), it cannot differentiate between two keys with the same ASCII value, such as the 8 key on the main keyboard and the 8 key on the numeric keypad.
To detect the pressing of specific keys relative to their physical location on a keyboard rather than their ASCII value (such as would be desirable when using four keys in a diamond pattern to control game play), use getCode( ).
The following example demonstrates keystroke detection for a simple hangman word game. It uses a keyDown event handler to identify the pressing of a key and adds that key to a list of user guesses:
onClipEvent (keyDown) {
var lastKey = Key.getAscii( );
guessNum++;
userGuesses[guessNum] = String.fromCharCode(lastKey);
}Key.getCode( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes", and Section 10.11.4, "keyDown" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| Key.getCode( ) Method | returns the keycode of the last key pressed |
Flash 5
Key.getCode()
An integer representing the keycode of the last key pressed.
The getCode( ) method returns the keycode of the last key that was pressed, which is an arbitrary number representing the physical location of a key on the keyboard. On non-Windows operating systems, the native keycode system is translated automatically by Flash to the Windows equivalent, so getCode( ) provides a cross-platform means of referring to specific keys. The getCode( ) method can also be used to differentiate between two keys with the same ASCII value. For example, it can differentiate between the 8 key on the main keyboard and the 8 key on the numeric keypad, whereas getAscii( ) cannot. However, getCode( ) cannot differentiate between upper- and lowercase letters (for example, A and a use the same keycode because they are produced using the same key).
Many common keycode values are available as properties of the Key object (e.g., Key.UP, Key.BACKSPACE). To determine the keycode of a particular key, see Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes" or construct a keycode tester as follows:
Create a new Flash document.
At frame 2 of the timeline, add a frame.
On frame 1, add the following code:
trace(Key.getCode( ));
Select Control Test Movie.
Click the movie's Stage.
Press a key. The key code for that key will appear in the Output window.
Unlike isDown( ), getCode( ) is useful for creating interfaces where an individual key press has a single, direct result. For example, the user may be able to skip a movie's intro by pressing the spacebar. When the spacebar is depressed, we send the playhead to the main interface of the movie (on the main timeline) as follows:
// Code on intro clip
onClipEvent (keyDown) {
if (Key.getCode( ) == Key.SPACE) {
_root.gotoAndStop("mainInterface");
}
}Key.getAscii( ), Key.isDown( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes", and Section 10.11.4, "keyDown" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| Key.isDown( ) Method | check whether a specific key is currently depressed |
Flash 5
Key.isDown(keycode)
A number representing the keycode of the key to check. May also be one of the Key constants (e.g., Key.UP, Key.BACKSPACE).
A Boolean indicating whether the key specified by keycode is pressed (true) or not pressed (false).
The isDown( ) method tells us whether the key specified by keycode is currently being pressed. It offers arbitrary, immediate access to the state of the keyboard and is best used with systems that require constant key-based input or that detect the pressing of simultaneous keys.
One important advantage of isDown( ) over getCode( ) and getAscii( ) is its ability to detect the simultaneous pressing of multiple keys. By checking for both Key.UP and Key.RIGHT, for example, we may determine that a spaceship in a game should be moved diagonally. Depending on the placement of the specific keys being tested, the maximum number of keys that can be simultaneously detected may be as low as three.
The isDown( ) method is normally used to create systems that undergo a constant update with each passing frame. In the following code, we rotate and thrust a spaceship on any frame where the appropriate arrow keys are being pressed. Note that if you need to detect two keys simultaneously, you should use separate if statements. In this example, the state of the right arrow key is ignored if the left arrow key is also being depressed. But regardless, the state of the up arrow key is always checked in a separate if statement. A working version of this spaceship example is available from the online Code Depot:
// Code on a spaceship clip
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
if (Key.isDown(Key.LEFT)) { // Left arrow
_rotation -= 10;
} else if (Key.isDown(Key.RIGHT)) { // Right arrow
_rotation += 10;
}
if (Key.isDown(Key.UP)) { // Up arrow
thrust += 10;
}
}Key.getCode( ); Section 10.11.4, "keyDown" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| Key.isToggled( ) Method | check whether the Caps Lock, Num Lock, or Scroll Lock keys are activated |
Flash 5
Key.isToggled(keycode)
An integer keycode, usually the keycode of the Caps Lock key (20), Num Lock key (144), or Scroll Lock key (145). May also be the key constant Key.CapsLock.
A Boolean indicating whether the key specified by keycode is on (true) or off (false).
The isToggled( ) method detects the state of the special Caps Lock, Num Lock, or Scroll Lock keys. Unlike other keys, these keys have an "on" state and an "off" state indicating whether or not the feature they represent is active. The return of isToggled( ) tells us if the key's feature is in effect or not. (Though isToggled( ) actually works for any keycode, its return value is useful only for special keys that support a toggle feature. To detect the state of other keys, use isDown( ), getCode( ), or getAscii( ).)
| _leveln Global Property | a document level in the Player |
Flash 3 and later
_level0 _level1 _level2 ... _leveln
Read-only
Multiple .swf files may be loaded into the Flash Player for simultaneous display. Each loaded .swf resides on its own level in the document level stack. (A .swf file on a higher level number will obscure lower levels if they occupy the same portion of the Stage.) The _leveln property stores a reference to the main timeline of a .swf loaded into a document level in the Player. Each document level is represented by a numbered property, such as _level0, _level1, _level2, and so on.
The original document loaded into any Flash Player is considered _level0.
A _leveln reference is normally used to control movies on other levels of the document stack. For example, here we play the movie on level 2:
_level2.play( );
We can also use _leveln in combination with movie clip references to control clips contained by a movie on any level in the document stack. For example:
_level1.orderForm.titleBar.play( );
A _leveln reference may also be used as the value of the target argument of several functions, including loadMovie( ), unloadMovie( ), loadVariables( ) and print( ). If the level does not yet exist, you should specify the level reference within quotes. If used without quotes, a nonexistent level is considered undefined and may cause the command to operate on the current timeline instead of the new, undefined level. For example, when executed from the main timeline of _level0, the following will replace the movie in _level0 if _level1 has not yet been defined:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", _level1);The following is a safer approach if you can't guarantee that the level already exists:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level1"); // Works even if _level1 doesn't existOf course, from other levels, you may wish to refer to the original level, using _level0, such as:
startDrag(_level0, true);
loadMovie( ), unloadMovie( ), -root; Section 13.3.4, "Importing External Movies" and Section 13.4, "Movie and Instance Stacking Order" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| loadMovie( ) Global Function | load an external .swf file into the Player |
Flash 4 and later. The loadMovie( ) function in Flash 5 corresponds to the Flash 4 Load Movie with a target path.
loadMovie(URL, target) loadMovie(URL, target, method)
A string specifying the absolute or relative file path to the external .swf file to load. All URLs must use forward slashes, and absolute URLs must include either the http:// or file|/// protocol reference.
A string indicating the movie clip or document level that will host the external .swf file. May also be a reference to an existing movie clip or document level (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
An optional string indicating the method by which to send variables to an external script. The legal values for method are "GET" and "POST". This parameter must be a literal, not a variable or other expression. The standalone version of the Flash Player always uses the "GET" method regardless of the method specified.
The loadMovie( ) function imports the .swf file located at URL into the Flash Player.
If target is a reference to an existing movie clip or a string indicating the path to a movie clip, the loaded .swf file is placed into the specified clip (causing the eviction of any previous content). To load a movie into the current movie clip, use the empty string as the target parameter, as in:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "")If target is a reference to an existing document level (such as _level2) or a string indicating the path to a document level (such as "_level2"), then the .swf is placed into the specified document level. Loading a movie into _level0 clears the Player of all content and places the new .swf file into _level0.
It is possible to send variables along with a loadMovie( ) invocation, in which case URL is normally the location of a script that returns a .swf file based on the variables sent. To send variables with a loadMovie( ) call, we include the method argument (set to either "GET" or "POST"). "GET" sends the current movie clip timeline variables as a query string attached to the script URL. "POST" sends the current movie clip timeline variables after the HTTP POST-request header. The "POST" method is not available in the standalone Flash Player. Because most web servers restrict the length of URLs to between 255 and 1024 characters, use "POST" instead of "GET" to transfer larger amounts of data.
Over a web server, loadMovie( ) invocations that use the "GET" method can pass variables to a loaded movie without the help of an intervening script. Here, we load the external movie myMovie.swf into level 1 of the Player document stack, passing it the variables from the current timeline:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level1", "GET");Variables passed to the loaded movie are defined on that movie's main timeline. This technique works only when the loadMovie( ) request is handled by a web server. Attempts to use the "GET" method with loadMovie( ) using local files will cause an "Error opening URL" error.
Be careful when using movie clip and level references as the target argument of loadMovie( ). If a loadMovie( ) 's target argument yields undefined, the loadMovie( ) function uses the current timeline as its target. Similarly, target references that yield the empty string cause loadMovie( ) to operate on the current timeline. In particular, this causes problems for loading movies onto new, unoccupied levels. Consider the following code:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", _level1);If no _level1 object exists prior to the execution of that statement, that code will load myMovie.swf into the timeline that contains the loadMovie( ) statement, not _level1! To avoid the problem, you can use loadMovieNum( ) instead. Alternatively, you can use a string for the target parameter to loadMovie( ), as in:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level1");In that case, the level will be created if it doesn't already exist (only _level0 exists by default in all movies). For more information, see Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips".
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level1"); // Place myMovie.swf on level 1
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level0"); // Place myMovie.swf on level 0
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "myClip"); // Place myMovie.swf into myClip
// Replace the contents of the Player with
// coolmovie.swf, using an absolute path
loadMovie("http://www.yourflashsite.com/coolmovie.swf", "_level0");
// Load a movie into level 1 from the Windows desktop. Note the
// file:/// protocol and the forward slashes.
loadMovie("file:///C|/WINDOWS/Desktop/animation.swf", "_level1");loadMovieNum( ), MovieClip.loadMovie( ), unloadMovie( ); Section 13.3.4, "Importing External Movies" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| loadMovieNum( ) Global Function | load an external .swf file into a document level |
Flash 3; enhanced in Flash 4 to include the method parameter; available in Flash 5. The loadMovieNum( ) function corresponds with Flash 3's Load Movie, which accepted only level numbers.
loadMovieNum(URL, level) loadMovieNum(URL, level, method)
A string specifying the absolute or relative file path of the external .swf file to load.
A non-negative integer, or an expression that yields one, indicating the document level that will host the external .swf file.
An optional string indicating the method by which to send variables to an external script. The legal values for method are "GET" and "POST". This parameter must be a literal, not a variable or other expression. The standalone version of the Flash Player always uses the "GET" method regardless of the method specified.
The loadMovieNum( ) function is nearly identical to loadMovie( ) except that it requires the target level of the load operation to be specified as a number rather than as a string. This means that loadMovieNum( ) can load movies only into document levels, not host clips. If the specified level doesn't exist, it will be created. If the specified level does exist, its occupant is replaced by the new .swf file. It is valid to load a movie into _level2 even if _level1 hasn't been created.
The loadMovieNum( ) function can be used when we wish to dynamically assign the level of a loaded movie, as in:
var x = 3;
loadMovieNum("myMovie.swf", x);which could also be achieved via a string concatenation expression with the regular loadMovie( ) function:
loadMovie("myMovie.swf", "_level" + x);loadMovie( ), MovieClip.loadMovie( )
| loadVariables( ) Global Function | retrieve an external set of variables |
Flash 4 and later
loadVariables(URL, target) loadVariables(URL, target, method)
A string specifying the path to a variable source -- either a server-side script that returns variables or a text file containing variables.
A string indicating the path to the movie clip or document level on which the loaded variables will be defined. May also be a reference to a movie clip or document level (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
An optional string indicating the method by which to send variables to an external script. If specified, the variables from the current timeline are sent to the script and target receives the loaded variables. If omitted, variables are retrieved but none are sent. The legal values for method are "GET" and "POST". This parameter must be a literal, not a variable or other expression. The standalone version of the Flash Player always uses the "GET" method regardless of the method specified.
Normally, we define variables inside our movies using ActionScript. However, using loadVariables( ), we may also import variables into a movie from a text file or a server-side application such as a Perl script. Variables loaded via loadVariables( ) are scoped to the movie clip or level specified by target and are always of the string datatype. To attach loaded variables to the current timeline, use the empty string as the value of the target argument. For example:
loadVariables("myVars.txt", ""); // Loads the variables from myVars.txt onto
// the current timelineWhether the variables to be loaded reside in a text file or are composed by a script, they must be formatted according to the rules of URL encoding, as follows:
Every variable name should be separated from its value with an equals sign, without spaces, as in firstName=stephen.
Multiple variable name/value pairs should be separated by ampersands (&), as in firstName=stephen&lastName=burke.
Spaces should be replaced with plus (+) signs.
Any character that is not a space, a number (1-9), or an unaccented Latin 1 letter (a-z, A-Z) should be replaced by a hexadecimal escape sequence of the form %xx, where xx is the hex Latin 1 code point of the character.
For example, the following code shows the contents of a text file to be imported into Flash via loadVariables( ). The imported variables are name and address, which have the values "stephen" and "65 nowhere st!", respectively:
name=stephen&address=65+nowhere+st%21
A text file for use with loadVariables( ) is simply a regular text file containing URL-encoded variables, as shown previously. To load variables from an external text file, we specify the path of the file as the URL argument in our loadVariables( ) function invocation. For example:
// Load the variables from myVariables.txt into the main movie timeline
loadVariables("myVariables.txt", "_root");loadVariables( ) may also be used with a script or server application that outputs URL-encoded variables. When a script sends data to a Flash movie in response to a loadVariables( ) function, the script should set the MIME type of the data as: "application/x-www-urlform-encoded". Here's a typical MIME-setting statement from a Perl script:
print "Content-type: application/x-www-urlform-encoded\n\n";
Though the name loadVariables( ) suggests only a single direction of variable transmission, it may also be used to send variables to a server-side script. To send all the variables defined on the current timeline to a script, we set the method argument of a loadVariables( ) function invocation to either "GET" or "POST". Variables are sent in URL-encoded format. If method is set to "GET", the variables are sent as a query string of the script URL. If method is set to "POST", the variables are sent after the HTTP POST-request header. The "POST" method is not available in the standalone Flash Player. Because most web servers restrict the length of URLs to between 255 and 1024 characters, use "POST" instead of "GET" to transfer larger amounts of data.
For security reasons, loadVariables( ) works only with hosts in the domain from which the movie was downloaded. The rules that govern loadVariables( ) usage are listed in Table 20-8. These security measures affect the Flash Player browser plugins and ActiveX controls only; variables may be loaded from any domain in the standalone Player.
|
Domain of Movie Origin |
Host to Connect to |
Permitted? |
|---|---|---|
|
www.somewhere.com |
www.somewhere.com |
Yes |
|
www.somewhere.com |
other.somewhere.com |
Yes |
|
www.somewhere.com |
www.somewhere-else.com |
No |
|
www.somewhere.com |
somewhere.com |
Yes |
|
somewhere.com |
www.somewhere.com |
Yes |
Domain restriction is an intentional security feature of Flash, but it can be circumvented with either a proxy script running on siteX that acts as a go-between for Flash and siteY, or a DNS alias on siteX that points to siteY. For more information, see:
http://www.macromedia.com/support/flash/ts/documents/loadvars_security.htm
The results of multiple loadVariable( ) calls to the same script URL may be cached on some browsers to the point that new data is never loaded from the server. To avoid this problem, append a dummy variable to each loadVariables( ) call so that the URL is unique. For example, here we generate a unique URL by appending the time in milliseconds:
loadVariables("http://www.mysite.com/cgi-bin/myScript.pl?cacheKiller="
+ getTimer( ), serverResponse);The POST method is not supported by Internet Explorer 4.5 on Macintosh. This problem was fixed in Version 5 of the browser.
loadVariablesNum( ) , MovieClip.loadVariables( ); Chapter 17, "Flash Forms"
| loadVariablesNum( ) Global Function | attach an external set of variables to a document level |
Flash 5. Use the Load Variables Action in Flash 4 to place variables on a document level.
loadVariablesNum(URL, level) loadVariablesNum(URL, level, method)
A string specifying the path to a variable source -- either a server-side script that returns variables or a text file containing variables.
A non-negative integer, or an expression that yields one, indicating the document level on which the loaded variables will be defined.
An optional string indicating the method by which to send variables to an external script. If specified, the variables from the current timeline are sent to the script, and level receives the loaded variables. If omitted, variables are retrieved but none are loaded. The legal values for method are "GET" and "POST". This parameter must be a literal, not a variable or other expression. The standalone version of the Flash Player always uses the "GET" method regardless of the method specified.
The loadVariablesNum( ) function is nearly identical to loadVariables( ) except that it requires the target level to be specified as a number rather than as a string. This means that loadVariablesNum( ) can attach variables to document levels only, not movie clips. The target level can be specified dynamically, as in:
var myLevel = 2;
loadVariablesNum("myVars.txt", myLevel);A similar effect could be achieved using string concatenation with the regular loadVariables( ) function:
loadVariables("myVars.txt", "_level" + myLevel);loadVariables( )
| Math Object | access to mathematical functions and constants |
Flash 5
Math.propertyName Math.methodName()
The natural logarithm of 10 (loge10), approximately 2.30259.
The natural logarithm of 2 (loge2), approximately 0.69315.
The base-10 logarithm of e, approximately 0.43429.
The base-2 logarithm of e, approximately 1.44270. See bug noted in detailed listing.
The ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter, approximately 3.14159.
The reciprocal of the square root of 2, approximately 0.70711.
Square root of 2, approximately 1.41421.
Compute the absolute value of a number.
Compute the arc cosine of a number.
Compute the arc sine of a number.
Compute the arc tangent of a number.
Compute the angle of a point, relative to the x-axis.
Round a number up to the next integer.
Compute the cosine of an angle.
Raise e to a specified power.
Return the closest integer less than or equal to the input.
Compute the natural logarithm of a number.
Determine the larger of two numbers.
Determine the smaller of two numbers.
Raise a number to a specified power.
Retrieve a random floating-point number between 0 and 1.
Calculate the closest integer to a number.
Compute the sine of an angle.
Compute the square root of a number.
Compute the tangent of an angle.
The Math object provides access to built-in mathematical functions (accessed through methods) and constant values (accessed through properties). These functions and constants are used to perform potentially complex calculations with relative ease.
Note that the properties and methods of the Math object may be used in movies exported to the Flash 4 format, in which case Flash will approximate the calculations. The resulting values are reasonable approximations but not necessarily identical to the native Flash 5 functions. The Flash 4 values are sufficiently accurate for "close-enough" applications such as graphics display but are not accurate enough for critical financial or engineering calculations.
Note that the trigonometric functions require angles to be measured
in radians whereas Flash's
MovieClip._rotation property
is measured in degrees. There are 2
radians in a circle (1
radian is approximately 57.3 degrees). To convert from radians to
degrees, use the formula:
degrees = (radians / Math.PI) * 180;
To convert from degrees to radians, use the formula:
radians = (degrees / 180) * Math.PI;
Math.atan2( ), Math.cos( ); Section 4.1, "The Number Type" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Math.abs( ) Method | compute the absolute value of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.abs(x)
A positive or negative number.
The absolute value of x (a positive number of magnitude x).
The abs( ) method calculates the distance between x and (also known as the absolute value of x). It leaves positive numbers unchanged and converts negative numbers into positive numbers of the same magnitude. It is useful for calculating the difference between two numbers without regard to which is larger than the other. For example, it is useful when calculating the distance between two points because distances are always positive.
Math.abs(-5); // Returns 5
// Calculate the difference between two numbers
function diff (num1, num2) {
return Math.abs(num1-num2);
}
diff(-5, 5); // Returns 10| Math.acos( ) Method | compute the arc cosine of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.acos(x)
A number between -1.0 and 1.0 (the cosine of an angle).
The angle, in radians, whose cosine is x . If x is not in the range -1.0 to 1.0, returns NaN.
The arc cosine function (sometimes written as
cos-1) is the inverse of the cosine
function. It returns the angle whose cosine has the specified value,
in radians. The return value is in the range
to (i.e.,
to 3.14159...).
trace (Math.acos(1.0)); // Displays: 0 trace (Math.acos(0.0)); // Displays: 1.5707... (i.e., pi/2)
Math.asin( ), Math.atan( ), Math.cos( )
| Math.asin( ) Method | compute the arc sine of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.asin(x)
A number between -1.0 and 1.0 (the sine of an angle).
The angle, in radians, whose sine is x . If x is not in the range -1.0 to 1.0, returns NaN.
The arc sine function (sometimes written as
sin-1) is the inverse of the sine
function. It returns the angle whose sine has the specified value, in
radians. The return value is in the range -/2 to /2
radians.
trace (Math.asin(1.0)); // Displays: 1.5707... (i.e., pi/2) trace (Math.asin(0.0)); // Displays: 0
Math.acos, Math.atan, Math.sin
| Math.atan( ) Method | compute the arc tangent of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.atan(x)
A number between -Infinity and Infinity, inclusive (the tangent of some angle).
The angle, in radians, whose tangent is x .
The arc tan function (sometimes written as
tan-1) is the inverse of the tangent
function. It returns the angle whose tangent has the specified value,
in radians. The return value is in the range -/2 to /2.
trace (Math.atan(1.0)); // Displays: 0.78539... trace (Math.atan(0.0)); // Displays: 0 trace (Math.atan(-Infinity)); // Displays: -1.5707... (i.e., -pi/2)
Math.acos( ), Math.asin( ), Math.tan( )
| Math.atan2( ) Method | determine an angle based on a point |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.atan2(y, x)
The y-coordinate of the point.
The x-coordinate of the point.
The angle, in radians, of the point (x,
y) from the center of a circle, measured
counterclockwise from the circle's positive horizontal axis
(i.e., the X-axis). Ranges from to -. (Negative values
indicate angles below the X-axis).
The atan2() method, like atan( ), performs an arc tangent calculation but uses x- and y-coordinates, rather than their ratio, as arguments. That is, calculating an arc tangent with atan2( ) as:
Math.atan2(9, 3); // Yields 1.24904577239825
is equivalent to calculating the arc tangent with atan( ), using the ratio of 9/3 (or 3), as follows:
Math.atan(3); // Same thing
Note that the y -coordinate is passed as the first argument to atan2( ), whereas the x-coordinate is passed as the second argument. This is intentional and required. It mirrors the structure of tangent, which is the ratio of the side opposite an angle (y) divided by the side adjacent to the angle (x).
The atan2( ) method can be used to make a movie clip point toward a moving target. The following example, available at the online Code Depot, shows code that rotates the current clip toward the mouse pointer. It can be used to orient an enemy spaceship toward a player's spaceship:
// Rotate movie clip toward mouse
onClipEvent (load) {
// Convert radians to degrees. There are 2*pi radians per 360 degrees.
function radiansToDegrees(radians) {
return (radians/Math.PI) * 180;
}
}
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
// Create a point object that stores the x- and y- coordinates of
// this clip relative to its parent's registration point
point = {x:_x, y:_y};
// Convert our local (parent) coordinates to global (Stage) coordinates
_parent.localToGlobal(point);
// Measure the distance between the registration
// point of this clip and the mouse
deltaX = _root._xmouse - point.x;
deltaY = _root._ymouse - point.y;
// Calculate the angle of the line from the registration point
// of this clip to the mouse
rotationRadian = Math.atan2(deltaY, deltaX);
// Convert the radian version of the angle to degrees
rotationAngle = radiansToDegrees(rotationRadian); // See earlier function
// Update the rotation of this clip to point to the mouse
this._rotation = rotationAngle;
}
| Math.ceil( ) Method | round a number up to the next integer |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.ceil(x)
A number.
The next integer greater than or equal to x.
The ceil( ) (i.e., ceiling) method converts a floating-point number to the first integer greater than or equal to x.
Math.ceil(1.00001); // Returns 2 Math.ceil(5.5); // Returns 6 Math.ceil(-5.5); // Returns -5
Math.floor( ), Math.round( )
| Math.cos( ) Method | compute the cosine of an angle |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.cos(theta)
An angle, in radians (not degrees), in the range 0 to 2.
The cosine of theta (the result is in the range -1.0 to 1.0).
The cos( ) function returns the trigonometric cosine of an angle. In a right triangle, the cosine of an angle is the result of dividing the length of the side adjacent to the angle by the triangle's hypotenuse.
Note that cos( ) expects angles to be provided in radians, not degrees.
trace (cos(0)); // Displays: 1.0 trace (cos(Math.PI)); // Displays: -1.0
The cos( ) function can be used along with
sin( ) to calculate a point on a circle, which
we use in the following example to move a movie clip in a circular
path. Given the radius of a circle, r, and an
angle, 
, measured counterclockwise from the positive horizontal
axis, a point's location is (r*cos, r*sin):
// CODE ON FRAME 1
var radius = 100; // Radius of circle path
var centerX = 275; // Horizontal center of circle path
var centerY = 200; // Vertical center of circle path
var rotAngleDeg = 0; // Angle of object in degrees, measured
// counterclockwise from the horizon (x-axis)
var rotAngRad; // Radian version of rotAngleDeg
// Convert degrees to radians. There are 2*pi radians per 360 degrees.
function degreesToRadians(degrees) {
return (degrees/180) * Math.PI;
}
// CODE ON FRAME 2
// Increase the rotation angle by 5 degrees
rotAngleDeg += 5;
// Place the object. Note that Flash inverts the Y-axis of Cartesian coordinates
// so we decrement y to obtain our new location
rotAngRad= degreesToRadians(rotAngleDeg);
ball._x = centerX + Math.cos(rotAngRad) * radius;
ball._y = centerY - Math.sin(rotAngRad) * radius;
// CODE ON FRAME 3
// Go back to frame 2 where we move the ball again
gotoAndPlay(2);Math.acos( ), Math.sin( ), Math.tan( )
| Math.E Property | the constant e (the base of the natural logarithm) |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.E
The E property stores an
approximation of the natural logarithmic base (roughly 2.71828),
which in mathematics is represented by the symbol
e. It is a transcendental number like ,
used in mathematical equations involving growth or change.
Don't confuse it with the E that is used for
exponential notation as described in Section 4.3.2, "Floating-Point Literals" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes". The
two are unrelated.
Math.log( ), Math.LN10( ), Math.LN2( )
| Math.exp( ) Method | raise the constant e to a specified power |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.exp(x)
The exponent to which to raise Math.E.
Math.E to the power x .
| Math.floor( ) Method | round a number to down to the previous integer |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.floor(x)
A number.
The closest integer less than or equal to x.
The floor method converts a floating-point number to the first integer less than or equal to x .
Math.floor(1.99999); // Returns 1
Math.floor(5.5); // Returns 5
Math.floor(-5.5); // Returns -6
function minutesToHHMM (minutes) {
var hours = Math.floor(minutes/60);
minutes -= hours * 60;
minutes = minutes < 10 ? "0" + minutes : minutes;
return hours + ":" + minutes;
}Math.ceil( ), Math.round( )
| Math.LN10 Property | natural logarithm of 10 (loge10), approximately 2.30259 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.LN10
The LN10 property represents the natural logarithm of 10 (the base-e logarithm of 10), a constant equaling approximately 2.30259.
| Math.LN2 Property | natural logarithm of 2 (loge2), approximately 0.69315 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.LN2
The LN2 property represents the natural logarithm of 2 (the base-e logarithm of 2), a constant equaling approximately 0.69315
| Math.log( ) Method | compute the natural logarithm of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.log(x)
A positive integer.
The natural logarithm of x .
The log( ) method calculates the natural logarithm (i.e., the base-e logarithm) of a number. See the following example to calculate the base-10 logarithm.
trace (Math.log(Math.E)); // Displays: 1
// Compute the base-10 logarithm of a number
function log10 (x) {
return (Math.log(x) / Math.log(10));
}| Math.LOG10E Property | base-10 logarithm of e, approximately 0.43429 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.LOG10E
The LOG10E property represents the common logarithm of e (the base-10 logarithm of e), a constant equaling approximately 0.43429.
| Math.LOG2E Property | base-2 logarithm of e, approximately 1.44270 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.LOG2E
The LOG2E property represents the base-2 logarithm of e (log2e), a constant equaling approximately 1.44270.
In Flash 5r30, LOG2E erroneously returns the value of LN2 (0.69315).
| Math.max( ) Method | determine the larger of two numbers |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.max(x, y)
A number.
A number.
The larger of x and y.
Math.max(5, 1); // Returns 5 Math.max(-6, -5); // Returns -5
This example constrains a value to the specified range:
function constrainToRange (checkVal, minVal, maxVal) {
return Math.min(Math.max(checkVal, minVal), maxVal);
}
// Constrain the slider to the stage area
mySlider._x = constainToRange (mySlider._x, 0, 550);This example returns the maximum value in an array:
function maxInArray (checkArray) {
maxVal = -Number.MAX_VALUE; // Initialize maxVal to a very small number
for (var i = 0; i < checkArray.length; i++) {
maxVal = Math.max(checkArray[i], maxVal);
}
return maxVal;
}
trace(maxInArray([2,3,66,4,342,-90,0])); // Displays: 342Math.min( )
| Math.min( ) Method | determine the smaller of two numbers |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.min(x, y)
A number.
A number.
The smaller of x and y.
Math.min(5, 1); // Returns 1 Math.min(-6, -5); // Returns -6
Reader Exercise: Modify the example under Math.max( ) to return the minimum value in an array rather than the maximum.
Math.max( )
| Math.PI Property | the ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter, approximately 3.14159 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.PI
The PI property represents the constant , the
ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter.
Math.PI is most famously used in calculating the area of a circle:
function circleArea (radius) {
// PI times the radius squared could also be
// written as Math.PI * Math.pow(radius, 2)
return Math.PI * (radius * radius);
}| Math.pow( ) Method | raise a number to a specified power |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.pow(base, exponent)
A number representing the base of the exponential expression.
A number representing the power (i.e., exponent) to which to raise base.
The base raised to the power exponent.
The pow( ) method can be used to raise any number to any power. If exponent is negative, pow( ) returns 1 / (baseabs(exponent)). If exponent is a fraction, pow( ) can be used to take, say, the square root or cube root of a number (in which case it returns the positive root, although, mathematically, there may also be a negative root).
Math.pow(5, 2); // Returns 25 (5 squared) Math.pow(5, 3); // Returns 125 (5 cubed) Math.pow(5, -2); // Returns 0.04 (1 divided by 25) Math.pow(8, 1/3); // Returns 2 (cube root of 8) Math.pow(9, 1/2); // Returns 3 (square root of 9) Math.pow(10, 6); // Returns 1000000 (can also be written as 1e6)
Build 30 of the Flash 5 Player did not correctly calculate Math.pow( ) for negative values of base. For example, Math.pow(-2, 2) was calculated as NaN whereas it should be 4.
Math.exp( ), Math.sqrt( ), Math.SQRT2, Math.SQRT1_2
| Math.random( ) Method | generate a random number from 0 to 1.0 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.random()
A floating-point number greater than or equal to 0.0 and less than 1.0.
The random( ) method provides a way to produce random numbers, which can be used to choose randomly between actions in a script. The random( ) method generates a random value between 0 and .99999... inclusive, which we can scale according to our needs. For example, to obtain a random number between 0 and 5, we use:
Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 6)
And to obtain a random number between 1 and 6, we use:
Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 6) + 1
This custom function returns an integer number in a specified range rather than a floating-point number in the range 0 to 1:
// Returns a number in the range minVal to maxVal, inclusive
function myRandom (minVal, maxVal) {
return minVal + Math.floor(Math.random( ) * (maxVal + 1 - minVal));
}
// Invoke the function
dieRoll = myRandom(1, 6); // Emulates a six-sided die
trace(dieRoll);
// Note that to simulate two dice, you can use this:
twoDice = myRandom(2, 12); // The minimum value is 2, not 1
// To return the die values separately, use an array
function rollTwoDice ( ) {
return [myRandom(1, 6), myRandom(1, 6)];
}Due to a bug in Build 30 of the Flash 5 Player, this approach is prone to an extremely rare, but potentially important inaccuracy. In Build 30, random( ) generates values in the range 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive. When we multiply the return of random( ) by an integer, n, we produce values in the range 0.0 to n. In our example, we multiplied Math.random( ) by 6, so that the returned value ranges from 0.0 to 6.0. By invoking floor( ) on the adjusted value, we produce integers in the range to n (0 to 6 in our example). This leads to an inaccurate distribution of random numbers -- the chance of producing n is much smaller than the chance of producing any other number in the series.
The following version of the myRandom( ) function avoids the problem by simply discarding the value 1.0 if it happens to be chosen by Math.random( ):
// Returns an integer in the range minVal to maxVal, inclusive
function myRandom (minVal, maxVal) {
do {
r = Math.random( ); // Keep picking a number until it is not 1.
} while (r == 1);
return minVal + Math.floor(r * (maxVal + 1 - minVal));
}
// Invoke the function
dieRoll = myRandom(1, 6); // Emulates a six-sided die safely in Build 30
// of the Flash 5 PlayerMath.random( ) replaces the deprecated Flash 4 random function.
Math.random( ) is often used to cause the playhead to jump to a random frame in the timeline. The following code invokes the myRandom( ) function from the preceding example and then sends the playhead to the randomly chosen frame:
// Invoke the function; pick a random number between 10 and 20 var destinationFrame = myRandom(10, 20); // Now send the playhead to that frame gotoAndStop(destinationFrame);
| Math.round( ) Method | calculate the closest integer to a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.round(x)
A number.
The integer mathematically closest to x (or x itself, if x is an integer). If the fractional component of x is exactly 0.5 (x is equidistant from the two closest integers), round( ) returns the first integer greater than x.
The round( ) method performs traditional rounding; it converts a floating-point number to the nearest integer. Positive numbers with a fractional portion less than 0.5 and negative numbers with a fractional portion greater than 0.5 are rounded down. Positive numbers with a fractional portion greater than or equal to 0.5 and negative numbers with a fractional portion less than or equal to 0.5 are rounded up.
Math.round(1.4); // Returns 1 Math.round(1.5); // Returns 2 Math.round(1.6); // Returns 2 Math.round(-5.4); // Returns -5 Math.round(-5.5); // Returns -5 Math.round(-5.6); // Returns -6
int( ), Math.ceil( ), Math.floor( )
| Math.sin( ) Method | compute the sine of an angle |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.sin(theta)
An angle, in radians (not degrees), in the range 0 to 2.
The sine of theta (the result is in the range -1.0 to 1.0).
The sin( ) method returns the trigonometric sine of an angle. In a right triangle, the sine of an angle is the result of dividing the length of the side opposite the angle by the triangle's hypotenuse.
Note that sin( ) expects angles to be provided in radians, not degrees.
trace (Math.sin(0)); // Displays: 0 trace (Math.sin(Math.PI/2)); // Displays: 1.0
The sin( ) function can be used along with cos( ) to calculate a point on a circle. See the example under Math.cos( ).
Math.asin( ), Math.cos( ), Math.tan( )
| Math.sqrt( ) Method | calculate the square root of a number |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.sqrt(x)
A non-negative integer.
The square root of x, or NaN if x is less than 0.
The sqrt( ) method returns the positive root of its operand (even though there may also be a mathematically valid negative root). It is equivalent to:
Math.pow(x, 0.5)
Math.sqrt(4); // Returns 2, although -2 is also a valid root Math.sqrt(36); // Returns 6, although -6 is also a valid root Math.sqrt(-20); // Returns NaN
Math.pow( ), Math.SQRT2, Math.SQRT1_2
| Math.SQRT1_2 Property | the reciprocal of the square root of 2, approximately 0.70711 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.SQRT1_2
The SQRT1_2 property is a constant approximating the value 1/Math.SQRT2 (the reciprocal of the square root of 2), equaling approximately 0.70711.
Math.SQRT2
| Math.SQRT2 Property | the square root of 2, approximately 1.41421 |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.SQRT2
The SQRT2 property is a constant approximating the square root of 2, an irrational number, equaling approximately 1.41421.
Math.SQRT1_2
| Math.tan( ) Method | compute the tangent of an angle |
Flash 5; may be used when exporting Flash 4 movies
Math.tan(theta)
An angle, in radians (not degrees), in the range -/2 to /2.
The tangent of theta (the result is in the range -Infinity to Infinity).
The tan( ) method returns the trigonometric
tangent of an angle. In a right triangle, the tangent of an angle is
the result of dividing the length of the side opposite the angle by
the length of the side adjacent to the angle. This is also the same
as the ratio Math.sin(theta)/Math.cos(theta), so
as cos(theta) approaches zero,
tan(theta) approaches
Infinity. Therefore,
tan(theta) is not calculable for the values
-/2, /2, -3/2, 3/2, etc.
trace (Math.tan(0)); // Displays: 0 trace (Math.tan(Math.PI/4)); // Displays: 1
Math.atan( ), Math.cos( ), Math.sin( )
| maxscroll Property | the last legal top line of a text field |
Flash 4 and later
textField.maxscroll
A positive integer representing the line number of the last legal top line of a text field.
The maxscroll property tells us the largest allowed scroll value for a text field. It represents the number of the last line in a text field that may be used as the top line in its viewable region.
The maxscroll property can be used with the scroll property to manage a scrolling-text field.
scroll; Section 18.4.2, "The maxscroll Property" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields"
| Mouse Object | hide or reveal the mouse pointer |
Flash 5
Mouse.methodName
Hides the mouse pointer.
Enables the mouse pointer.
The Mouse object has only two methods and no properties. We use Mouse.hide( ) to conceal the system mouse pointer, usually in order to replace it with a customized mouse pointer as shown later. It may also be desirable to hide the mouse pointer in fullscreen, keyboard-controlled movies or for touch-screen kiosks.
Note that the Mouse object does not tell us the location of the mouse pointer. That information is stored in the _xmouse and _ ymouse properties of each movie clip object. Use _root._xmouse and _root._ ymouse to determine the mouse pointer's location on the main Stage.
MovieClip._xmouse, MovieClip._ ymouse
| Mouse.hide( ) Method | make the mouse pointer disappear |
Flash 5
Mouse.hide()
The hide( ) method causes the normal mouse pointer (usually an arrow) to disappear when the mouse is over any part of the Player. The normal system pointer reappears when the mouse passes outside the Flash Player's active stage area.
Note that in Flash 5, even after Mouse.hide( ) has been invoked, the normal system text I-beam cursor will appear when the mouse hovers over a text field.
The hide( ) method is used to conceal the default system mouse pointer, typically in order to replace it with a custom pointer. In Flash, a custom pointer is nothing more than a movie clip that follows the mouse. Using the mouseMove event, we can cause a movie clip to follow the mouse by updating the clip's _x and _ y properties with each passing frame. The following code demonstrates the technique:
// Code on the clip that acts as the custom pointer
onClipEvent (load) {
Mouse.hide( );
}
onClipEvent (mouseMove) {
_x = _root._xmouse;
_y = _root._ymouse;
updateAfterEvent( );
}It may also be desirable to hide the custom pointer when the mouse is inactive, say, because the pointer has left the Flash Player's active stage area, in which case the system pointer appears and there are two pointers on screen. The following code shows how to adapt the previous code to hide the cursor after 5 seconds of inactivity:
onClipEvent (load) {
Mouse.hide( );
}
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
if (getTimer( ) - lastMove > 5000) {
_visible = false;
} else {
_visible = true;
}
}
onClipEvent (mouseMove) {
_x = _root._xmouse;
_y = _root._ymouse;
lastMove = getTimer( );
updateAfterEvent( );
}To change a custom pointer to a custom "hand" icon when the mouse hovers over a button, use the button's rollOver event to set the custom pointer clip to a frame containing the custom hand, and use the rollOut event to set the custom pointer back to the default, as follows:
on (rollOver) {
_root.customPointer.gotoAndStop("hand");
}
on (rollOut) {
_root.customPointer.gotoAndStop("default");
}In all cases, remember to place the custom pointer on the top layer of your movie so it appears above all other content. Alternatively, use duplicateMovieClip( ) or attachMovie( ) to dynamically generate the custom pointer clip and assign it a very high depth.
| Mouse.show( ) Method | make the mouse pointer appear |
Flash 5
Mouse.show()
The show( ) method causes the default system mouse pointer to reappear after Mouse.hide( ) has been invoked. It can be used to provide a normal pointer at necessary times in a movie, such as when the user is expected to fill in a form. This is one way to handle the unfortunate appearance of the text I-beam when the system pointer is hidden.
Mouse.hide( )
| MovieClip "Class" | class-like datatype for main movies and movie clips |
Flash 3 and later
None. Movie clip symbols are created manually in the Flash authoring tool. Movie clip instances can be created with attachMovie( ) and duplicateMovieClip().
Movie clip properties provide descriptions of, and control over, various physical features of movie clips and main movies. Properties are accessed using the dot operator, as with any object. See Section 13.1, "The "Objectness" of Movie Clips" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips", for details on using movie clip properties.
Two property-related issues to note:
Changing a physical property of a MovieClip object places that clip under programmatic control, breaking the internal timeline's hold on it. This halts any tween currently in progress.
Some MovieClip properties appear to be floating-point numbers but are mapped to other formats internally. The _alpha property, for example, is mapped to an integer between 0 and 255 internally. This results in a loss of precision between setting and retrieving values of certain properties. We may, for example, set a property value to 90 and then immediately retrieve the value back as 89.84375. If minor variations in property values make a difference to a script, we must manually round those values using Math.round( ), Math.floor( ), or Math.ceil( ) after retrieval, or we must store the original value in a variable separate from the property.
Table 20-9 lists the movie clip properties. Note that all built-in movie clip properties begin with an underscore. This make them easy to distinguish from custom properties that you can add to your movie clip and which by convention should not begin with an underscore. In the Access column of Table 20-9, R/W indicates that a property's value may be both retrieved and set (i.e., read/write), and RO indicates that it can be retrieved but not set (i.e., read-only). Some read-only properties can sometimes be set indirectly through the authoring tool or via some related function (e.g., gotoAndStop( ) sets the _currentframe property), but only read/write properties can be set directly via ActionScript. The Type column describes the datatype of each property's value. The Property Description column gives a quick summary of the property's purpose, but the full descriptions that follow later provide important details. With the exception of the _name and _parent properties, the properties in Table 20-9 apply to both movie clip instances and the main movie (i.e., _root). However, a property's value may differ markedly depending on whether it is checked from a movie clip instance or the main movie and may also differ depending on where the clip is attached. For example, a movie clip's _x property differs depending on whether it is attached to the main timeline or as a child of a parent clip. Furthermore, all properties of the current timeline may be accessed without an explicit reference to it, as in _alpha versus myClip._alpha.
|
Property Name |
Access |
Type |
Property Description |
|---|---|---|---|
|
R/W |
number |
Opacity percentage: 0 is transparent; 100 is opaque |
|
|
RO |
number |
Frame number at which playhead resides |
|
|
RO |
string |
Target path of the clip over which a dragged clip hovers or has been dropped, in slash notation |
|
|
RO |
number |
Number of frames that have been downloaded |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Height, in pixels, of the current contents |
|
|
R/W |
string |
Identifier of an instance as a string (not a reference) |
|
|
RO |
MovieClip reference |
A reference to the instance or movie that contains the current instance |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Degrees of rotation |
|
|
RO |
string |
Target path in absolute terms, in slash notation |
|
|
RO |
number |
Number of frames in the timeline |
|
|
RO |
string |
Disk or network location of the source .swf file |
|
|
R/W |
boolean |
Visibility: true if shown; false if hidden |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Width, in pixels, of the current contents |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Horizontal position, in pixels |
|
|
RO |
number |
Horizontal location of mouse pointer, in pixels |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Horizontal scaling percentage |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Vertical position, in pixels |
|
|
RO |
number |
Vertical location of mouse pointer, in pixels |
|
|
R/W |
number |
Vertical scaling percentage |
*Applies to movie clip instances; does not apply to the main timeline.
Movie clip methods may be invoked on any movie clip instance and, in most cases, on any main movie timeline. Many of the movie clip methods provide the same functionality as analogous global functions but simply use the convenient MovieClip.method( ) dot syntax format. Those that do not correspond to a global function may be applied to the current clip without an explicit reference to it, as in attachMovie( ) versus myClip.attachMovie( ). Table 20-10 lists the movie clip methods.
|
Method Name |
Method Description |
|---|---|
|
Creates a new instance based on an exported symbol from the current document's Library. Places the new instance in the host clip or the movie's programmatically generated clip stack. |
|
|
Creates a copy of the current instance and places the copy in the appropriate programmatically generated clip stack (see Section 13.4.2.2, "How clips generated via duplicateMovieClip( ) are added to the stack" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips".) |
|
|
Returns an object whose properties give the coordinates of the bounding box that defines the visual region occupied by the clip. |
|
|
Returns the number of downloaded bytes of an instance or a movie. Not applicable for use with internal clips. |
|
|
Returns the physical byte size of an instance or a main movie. |
|
|
Loads an external document (usually a web page) into the browser. |
|
|
Converts the properties of a coordinates object from Stage coordinates to instance coordinates. Has no effect when invoked on a main movie object (such as _root), because the original and target coordinate spaces are identical. |
|
|
Moves the playhead of an instance or movie to a specific frame, and then plays the instance or movie. |
|
|
Moves the playhead of an instance or movie to a specific frame and then stops the playhead. |
|
|
Returns a Boolean indicating whether or not a clip intersects with a given point or another clip. |
|
|
Brings an external .swf file into the Player. |
|
|
Retrieves external data composed of variable names and values and converts that data into equivalent ActionScript variables. |
|
|
Converts the properties of a coordinates object from an instance's coordinates to main movie coordinates. |
|
|
Moves the playhead of instance or movie ahead one frame and stops it there. |
|
|
Starts the playhead of instance or movie in motion (i.e., plays the clip). |
|
|
Moves the playhead of instance or movie back one frame and stops it there. |
|
|
Deletes a duplicated or attached instance. |
|
|
Causes instance or movie to physically follow the mouse pointer. |
|
|
Halts the playback of instance or movie. |
|
|
Ends any drag operation currently in progress. |
|
|
Alters the position of an instance in an instance stack. |
|
|
Removes an instance or main movie from a document level or host clip. |
|
|
Represents the path to the instance in absolute terms, using dot notation. |
*Applies to movie clip instances; does not apply to the main timeline.
Movie clip instances support event handlers, which respond automatically to a predefined set of events (e.g., mouse or keyboard interaction or movie playback). The supported movie clip event handlers are listed in Table 20-11. See Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers", for details on each.
|
Clip Event Occurs When... |
|
|---|---|
|
A frame passes in the Flash Player |
|
|
The clip first appears on the Stage |
|
|
The clip is removed from the Stage |
|
|
The clip receives the end of a stream of loaded variables, or a portion of a loaded movie |
|
|
Primary mouse button is depressed while the clip is on stage |
|
|
Primary mouse button is depressed and then released while the clip is on stage |
|
|
Mouse pointer moves (even a teensy bit) while the clip is on stage |
|
|
A key is pressed down while the clip is on stage |
|
|
A depressed key is released while the clip is on stage |
MovieClip is not actually a class in ActionScript but rather a unique ActionScript datatype used to represent information about, and allow control of, movies and movie clips. For most purposes, we treat movie clips and movies as objects; we may create and access movie clip properties, and we may create and invoke movie clip methods.
Because MovieClip is not a true class, we do not use a constructor to create new MovieClip instances. Instead, we create movie clip symbols in the authoring tool and place instances on the Stage manually. Some methods, however, allow us to copy existing clips (duplicateMovieClip( )), or add new clips to the Stage programmatically (attachMovie( )).
Not all MovieClip objects are equal; some MovieClip methods and properties apply only to movie clip instances, not to main movies (a main movie is the _root timeline of a .swf document). In our consideration of the MovieClip properties and methods, we'll note cases in which functionality is limited to one type of MovieClip object. Note that we use the word MovieClip to refer to the "class" of the objects, and the word movieclip (lowercase) to refer to the ActionScript datatype; we use movie clip, clip, or instance to refer to a particular movie clip, and we use movie to refer to the main movie of a .swf file. In the synopsis for each detailed property and method entry, the abbreviation mc stands in for the name of a clip or main movie. For many properties and methods, mc is optional -- if omitted, the current timeline is used.
Throughout this MovieClip section, when talking about coordinates, we need to refer to the location of movie clips. We measure the position of a clip in reference to one representative point, its so-called registration point , as marked by a crosshair in the clip's Library symbol.
When a clip resides on the main Stage, we describe its location relative to the top-left corner of the Stage, which corresponds to the point (0,0). When a clip resides within another clip, we describe its location relative to the registration point of the parent clip, which again corresponds to the point (0,0). The point (0,0) in both cases is the origin point (or simply origin) of the coordinate space being used to plot the location of the clip. We'll see how the localToGlobal( ) and globalToLocal( ) methods can convert between these two coordinate spaces.
TIP
Flash's coordinate system inverts the Y-axis of Cartesian coordinates; that is, y values increase in a downward direction, not upward. For example, a y-coordinate of 100 indicates a point 100 pixels below the X-axis.
We'll often use the coordinate-related properties and methods to move a clip, determine where a clip is, or determine whether it intersects another object or point. The last technique is referred to as collision detection because it is often used to determine whether to change the direction in which a clip is animating, as if it bounced off another object (see the MovieClip.hitTest( ) method).
Note that ActionScript doesn't have a native datatype to represent a point (i.e., an x- and y- coordinate). See MovieClip.globalToLocal( ) for an explanation of how to create a point object from a generic object.
For a full consideration of the MovieClip class, see Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip._alpha Property | opacity of a clip or movie |
Flash 4 and later
mc._alpha
Read/write
The floating-point _alpha property specifies the opacity (or conversely the transparency) of mc as a percentage -- 0 is completely transparent whereas 100 is completely opaque. Setting the _alpha of mc affects the visual transparency of all clips nested inside mc but does not affect their _alpha properties. That is, if we have a clip, square, that contains another clip, circle, and we set square._alpha to 50, then circle will be 50% transparent on-screen but will have an _alpha of 100.
Note that setting the _alpha of a movie clip affects the aa property of the object returned by Color.getTransform( ).
ball._alpha = 60; // Make ball partially transparent ball._alpha = 0; // Make ball invisible
The following clip event handler makes a clip more transparent as the mouse moves down on the screen:
onClipEvent(enterFrame) {
_alpha = 100 - (_root._ymouse / 400) * 100;
}The Color Class; MovieClip._visible
| MovieClip.attachMovie( ) Method | create a new movie clip instance from an exported Library symbol |
Flash 5
mc.attachMovie(symbolIdentifier, newName, depth)
A string specifying the linkage identifier of an exported movie clip
symbol, as set in the Library under Options Linkage.
A string specifying the new instance name of the clip being created. The name must adhere to the rules for creating an identifier outlined under Section 14.5, "Identifiers" in Chapter 14, "Lexical Structure".
An integer specifying the level on which to place the new clip in the programmatic clip stack above mc. A depth of -1 is below 0, 1 is in front of 0, 2 is in front of 1, and so on. See Section 13.4.2.1, "How clips generated via attachMovie( ) are added to the stack" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips" for more details. Negative depths are functional but not officially supported by ActionScript; to ensure future compatibility, use depths of 0 or greater.
The attachMovie( ) method creates a new instance called newName based on the exported movie clip symbol specified by symbolIdentifier. If mc is the main movie, the new instance is placed in the top-left corner of the Stage. If mc is a movie clip instance, the new instance is placed on mc's registration point. In either case, the new instance is placed above mc in a stack of programmatically-generated clips.
duplicateMovieClip( ), MovieClip.duplicateMovieClip( ); Section 13.3.2.3, "Creating instances with attachMovie( )" and Section 13.4.2.1, "How clips generated via attachMovie( ) are added to the stack" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip._currentframe Property | the frame number of the playhead of a clip or movie |
Flash 4 and later
mc._currentframe
Read-only
The integer _currentframe property represents the frame number at which the playhead of mc currently resides. Note that the first frame is 1, not 0; therefore, _currentframe ranges from 1 to mc._totalframes.
// Send a playhead back two frames from its current location gotoAndStop(_currentframe - 2);
MovieClip.gotoAndPlay( ), MovieClip.gotoAndStop( )
| MovieClip._droptarget Property | the path to the clip or movie on which a dragged clip was dropped |
Flash 4 and later
mc._droptarget
Read-only
If mc is being dragged, _droptarget stores a string indicating the path to the clip over which mc hovers (if any). If mc is not hovering over a clip, _droptarget stores undefined. If mc was previously dragged and then dropped on a clip, _droptarget stores a string indicating the path to the clip upon which mc was dropped. The path is provided in slash notation. A movie clip is considered to be "over" another clip if the registration point of the dragged clip overlaps any portion of the target clip.
The _droptarget property is convenient for creating drag-and-drop interfaces. The following example demonstrates how to create a simple shopping-basket interface using _droptarget (when an item clip is dropped onto the basket clip, the item is allowed to stay in the basket; otherwise, the item is returned to its original location):
// CODE ON FRAME ONE OF item
var origX = _x;
var origY = _y;
function drag( ) {
this.startDrag( );
}
function drop( ) {
stopDrag( );
if (_droptarget != "/basket") {
_x = origX;
_y = origY;
}
}
// CODE ON A BUTTON IN item
on (press) {
drag( );
}
on (release) {
drop( );
}Note that _droptarget stores a string, not a clip reference. To convert a _droptarget string to a movie clip reference, use the technique shown in the example for eval( ).
MovieClip.startDrag( ), MovieClip.stopDrag( )
| MovieClip.duplicateMovieClip( ) Method | create a copy of a movie clip |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form introduced in Flash 4)
mc.duplicateMovieClip(newName, depth)
A string that will become the instance name of the duplicated clip. The name must adhere to the rules for creating an identifier outlined under Section 14.5, "Identifiers" in Chapter 14, "Lexical Structure".
An integer specifying the level on which to place the new clip in the programmatically generated clip stack above mc . A depth of -1 is below 0, 1 is in front of 0, 2 is in front of 1, and so on. See Section 13.4.2.2, "How clips generated via duplicateMovieClip( ) are added to the stack" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips" for more details. Negative depths are functional but not officially supported by ActionScript; to ensure future compatibility, use depths of 0 or greater.
The MovieClip.duplicateMovieClip( ) method is an alternative to the global duplicateMovieClip( ) function. When invoked as a MovieClip method, duplicateMovieClip( ) takes no target parameter -- it duplicates mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global duplicateMovieClip( ) function.
MovieClip.attachMovie( ), duplicateMovieClip( )
| MovieClip._framesloaded Property | the number of frames of a clip or movie that have downloaded to the Player |
Flash 4 and later
mc._framesloaded
Read-only
The integer _framesloaded property indicates how many frames of mc have been loaded into the Player (from to mc._totalframes). It is normally used to create preloaders that pause playback until a sufficient number of frames have downloaded. For a movie clip, the _framesloaded property always equals _totalframes (because clips are loaded in their entirety before playing) unless the instance is in the process of loading an external .swf file due to a loadMovie( ) invocation. The _framesloaded property is, therefore, useful only with main movies or external .swf files loading into instances or levels.
Preloader code is traditionally placed directly on the main timeline of the movie being preloaded. A simple approach is to loop between frames 1 and 2 until the movie has loaded, at which point we go to the movie's start frame. For example:
// CODE ON FRAME 1
if (_framesloaded > 0 && _framesloaded == _totalframes) {
gotoAndPlay("beginMovie");
}
// CODE ON FRAME 2
gotoAndPlay(1);In Flash 5 and later, we may alternatively use the enterFrame movie clip event handler to build a more portable preloader. In the movie we wish to preload, at the frame where we want preloading to start, we invoke the stop( ) function. Then we place a movie clip with the following code on that movie's timeline:
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
loaded = _parent._framesloaded;
if (loaded > 0 && loaded == _parent._totalframes && loading != "done") {
_parent.gotoAndPlay("beginMovie");
loading = "done";
}
}In the preceding example, the clip tracks its parent's load progress and starts its parent playing when loading is finished. By using a movie clip as a preloader, we circumvent the need for a loop on the preloading movie's timeline. A movie clip preloader could even be turned into a Smart Clip, providing easier workflow for less experienced developers.
Notice that in our preloader examples, we checked whether _framesloaded > 0 in addition to whether _framesloaded == _totalframes. This is necessary because when a movie is unloaded from a clip, that clip has a _totalframes of 0. Hence, if _framesloaded is (as it might be on a very slow connection), the comparison _framesloaded == _totalframes can return true even when no frames have yet loaded. Our check prevents the movie from skipping ahead before the appropriate content has loaded. This precaution is not necessary with main movie preloaders for .swf files loaded onto levels, because their _totalframes property is never zero.
Preloaders often include a horizontal loading bar and a text field indicating the percentage of a movie that has downloaded. Loading bars are implemented as clips sized with either the _width property or the _xscale property. However, note that a clip scales about its registration point (proportionately on the right and left sides of the clip's registration point). Therefore, to size a clip from one side only, we must place all of the clip's content on one side of the registration point in the clip's symbol. The following example shows how to add a loading bar and a status text field to our earlier clip handler code:
// A Portable Preloader with a Status Bar
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
// Measure how many frames have loaded
loaded = _parent._framesloaded;
// If all the frames have finished loading...
if (loaded > 0 && loaded == _parent._totalframes && loading != "done") {
// ...play the movie and make a note that we're done loading
_parent.gotoAndPlay("beginMovie");
loading = "done";
}
// Determine the percentage of bytes that have loaded
percentDone = Math.floor((_parent.getBytesLoaded( )
/ _parent.getBytesTotal( )) * 100);
// Display the percentage of loaded bytes in the text field loadStatus
loadStatus = percentDone + "% complete";
// Set the size of our loadBar clip
loadBar._xscale = percentDone;
}Use the Bandwidth Profiler in Test Movie mode to simulate movie download for preloader testing.
MovieClip.getBytesLoaded( ), MovieClip._totalframes; Section 10.10.4, "data" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers", and Section 19.1.4, "The Bandwidth Profiler" in Chapter 19, "Debugging"
| MovieClip.getBounds( ) Method | determine the bounding box of a clip or movie |
Flash 5
mc.getBounds(targetCoordinateSpace)
A string indicating the path to the movie or clip in which space mc 's dimensions are measured. Because a movie clip reference is converted to a path when used in a string context, targetCoordinateSpace may also be a movie clip object reference, as in mc.getBounds(_root) versus mc.getBounds("_root"). Defaults to mc if not specified.
An object whose properties -- xMin, xMax, yMin, yMax -- describe the bounding box of the space occupied by mc. These four properties of the object respectfully specify the leftmost, rightmost, topmost, and bottommost pixel coordinates of mc.
The getBounds( ) method returns an anonymous object with properties that define the rectangular area occupied by mc (i.e., mc 's bounding box). To retrieve the values stored in the returned object, we must access that object's properties as shown in the next example.
The dimensions of the bounding box of a clip may be measured relative to any other clip or movie. Using the targetCoordinateSpace argument, we may pose the question, "If mc resided on targetCoordinateSpace's canvas, what area would it occupy?" The answer will be different depending on whether targetCoordinateSpace is a main movie or a clip instance; the origin point of the main movie's coordinate space is the top-left corner of the Stage, but the origin point of an instance's coordinate space is its registration point as marked in the clip's Library symbol (shown as a crosshair).
The getBounds( ) method can be used to perform basic collision detection between a movie or clip and some other point (though MovieClip.hitTest( ) serves this purpose better). It might also be used to identify a rectangular region in which to place a clip added to a movie with MovieClip.attachMovie( ).
var clipBounds = this.getBounds( ); var leftX = clipBounds.xMin; var rightX = clipBounds.xMax; var topY = clipBounds.yMin; var bottomY = clipBounds.yMax;
MovieClip.hitTest( )
| MovieClip.getBytesLoaded( ) Method | check the number of bytes that have downloaded to the Player |
Flash 5
mc.getBytesLoaded()
An integer representing the number of bytes of mc that have finished downloading to the Player. (Divide by 1024 to convert to kilobytes.)
The getBytesLoaded( ) method tells us the number of bytes of a movie that have downloaded into the Flash Player. However, getBytesLoaded( ) measures bytes in whole-frame chunks only. So if a movie's first frame is 200 bytes in size and its second frame is 3000 bytes in size, getBytesLoaded( ) will return 200 and 3200 but never any increment in between. Until all of a given frame has downloaded, the return value of getBytesLoaded( ) does not change. The getBytesLoaded( ) method may, therefore, be thought of as a "bytes version" of the _framesloaded property.
Note that internal movie clips are always entirely loaded before they are displayed, so the return value of getBytesLoaded( ) on an internal movie clip will always be the same as getBytesTotal( ) (unless the movie clip is currently loading an external .swf file in response to loadMovie( )). Therefore, getBytesLoaded( ) is effective only when used with a main movie or an external .swf file being loaded into an instance or level.
Like _framesloaded , getBytesLoaded( ) is normally used to build preloaders. It can be used in concert with getBytesTotal( ) to create a more accurate progress bar than is possible with _framesloaded and _totalframes (because the byte size of each frame may not be equal -- a movie with 10 frames is not 30% loaded when three frames are loaded if the frames differ widely in size).
// CODE ON FRAME 1
if (_framesloaded > 0 && _framesloaded == _totalframes) {
gotoAndPlay("beginMovie");
} else {
// Show the load progress in text fields. Divide by 1024 to convert to KB.
loadProgressOutput = this.getBytesLoaded( )/1024;
loadTotalOutput = this.getBytesTotal( )/1024;
}
// CODE ON FRAME 2
gotoAndPlay(1);MovieClip._framesloaded, MovieClip.getBytesTotal( )
| MovieClip.getBytesTotal( ) Method | check the size of a clip or movie, in bytes |
Flash 5
mc.getBytesTotal()
An integer representing the size of mc, in bytes. Divide by 1024 to convert to kilobytes.
The getBytesTotal( ) method tells us the size, in bytes, of a clip instance or the main movie. When invoked on the main movie, getBytesTotal( ) reports the size of the entire .swf. It is normally used in concert with getBytesLoaded( ) to produce preloaders for main movies and .swf files loaded into instances or levels.
MovieClip.getBytesLoaded( ), MovieClip._totalframes
| MovieClip.getURL( ) Method | load a document into a browser window |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2, enhanced in Flash 4 to include the method argument)
mc.getURL(URL, window, method)
A string specifying the location of the document to load or external script to run.
An optional string, specifying the name of the browser window or frame into which to load the document. May be a custom name or one of the four presets: "_blank", "_ parent", "_self", or "_top".
An optional string literal specifying the method by which to send the variables from mc to an external script. Must be either the literal "GET" or "POST"; no other expression is allowed.
The MovieClip.getURL( ) method is an alternative to the global getURL( ) function. Its method form is useful only when variables are being sent, in which case getURL( ) sends the variables from mc, which does not have to be the current timeline.
For general usage instructions, see the global getURL( ) function.
| MovieClip.globalToLocal( ) Method | convert a point on the main Stage to clip coordinates |
Flash 5
mc.globalToLocal(point)
A reference to an object with two properties, x and y, that describe a point on the main Stage of the Player (i.e., on _root). Both x and y may be any floating-point number.
The globalToLocal( ) method converts the x and y properties of point from coordinates on the main Stage to coordinates in the coordinate space of mc. Note that globalToLocal( ) does not return a new object, it merely modifies the existing x and y values of point.
To use globalToLocal( ), we must first create an object with x and y properties. For example:
var myPoint = new Object( ); myPoint.x = 10; myPoint.y = 20;
The x and y properties of our object are positions on the horizontal and vertical axes of the main Stage, relative to its top-left corner. For example, an x of 10 is 10 pixels to the right of the Stage's left edge, and a y of 20 is 20 pixels below the Stage's top border. With our object created and our x and y properties set, we then pass the object to the globalToLocal( ) method, as in:
myClip.globalToLocal(myPoint);
When globalToLocal( ) is executed, the values of myPoint's x and y properties are transformed to represent a point in the space of myClip, measured from myClip's registration point. By examining the new values of our myPoint object's properties, we answer the question, "Where does the point (x, y) of the main Stage appear in myClip ?" For example:
xInClip = myPoint.x; yInClip = myPoint.y;
The following example calculates the offset from the upper-left corner of the main Stage to the registration point of the current clip:
pt = new Object( ); // Create generic object to hold our point
pt.x = 0; // Left border of main Stage
pt.y = 0; // Top border of main Stage
this.globalToLocal(pt); // Convert pt to local coordinates
trace("From the current clip, the top-left corner of the main Stage is at ");
trace("x: " + pt.x + "y: " + pt.y);MovieClip.localToGlobal( )
| MovieClip.gotoAndPlay( ) Method | jump to a given frame, then play |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.gotoAndPlay(frameNumber) mc.gotoAndPlay(frameLabel)
A positive integer indicating the number of the frame to which the playhead of mc should jump before playing. If frameNumber is less than 1 or greater than the number of frames in mc 's timeline, the playhead is sent to either the first or last frame, respectively.
A string indicating the label of the frame to which the playhead of mc should jump before playing. If frameLabel is not found, the playhead is sent to the first frame of mc 's timeline.
The MovieClip.gotoAndPlay( ) method is an alternative to the global gotoAndPlay( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or movies, specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global gotoAndPlay( ) function.
// Send the part1 clip to the label intro, then play part1
part1.gotoAndPlay("intro");| MovieClip.gotoAndStop( ) Method | jump to a given frame, and stop the playhead |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.gotoAndStop(frameNumber) mc.gotoAndStop(frameLabel)
A positive integer indicating the number of the frame to which the playhead of mc should jump. If frameNumber is less than 1 or greater than the number of frames in mc 's timeline, the playhead is sent to either the first or last frame, respectively.
A string indicating the label of the frame to which the playhead of mc should jump. If frameLabel is not found, the playhead is sent to the first frame of mc 's timeline.
The MovieClip.gotoAndStop( ) method is an alternative to the global gotoAndStop( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or main movies specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global gotoAndStop( ) function.
// Send the mainMenu clip to frame 6 and stop the playhead there mainMenu.gotoAndStop(6);
| MovieClip._height Property | height of a clip or movie, in pixels |
Flash 4; enhanced in Flash 5
mc._height
Read-only in Flash 4; read/write in Flash 5
The floating-point _height property is a non-negative number specifying the height of mc, in pixels. If mc has no content, _height is 0. The _height property measures the content of a clip as the distance between the highest occupied pixel and the lowest occupied pixel, even if there is empty space between those pixels. An occupied pixel is a pixel that contains a shape, graphic, button, movie clip, or other content element. Changes made to a clip's height in the authoring tool or via _ yscale are reflected by _height.
We may set the value of _height in order to vertically resize a movie clip. Attempts to set _height to a negative value are ignored. Setting a clip's _height to does not make it invisible; rather, the clip becomes a one-pixel horizontal line.
The _height of the main movie (either
_root._height or
_leveln._height)
is not the Stage height as specified under Modify Movie
Dimensions in the authoring tool but rather the height of the
contents of the main movie. There is no explicit Stage height
property; if required, we must provide the Stage height manually as a
variable. For example, if a movie's Stage has a height of 400,
we could add the following variable:
_root.stageHeight = 400;
To make that value available on the timeline of any clip, use:
Object.prototype.stageHeight = 400;
Note that when we set the height of a movie clip, lines are scaled proportionally, losing their original point size as set in the Stroke panel. However, the point size of lines set to Hairline in the Stroke panel is not scaled when a movie clip is resized. That is, use hairlines to prevent your strokes from appearing fat or distorted when a clip is scaled.
ball._height = 20; // Set the height of ball to 20 pixels ball._height /= 2; // Reduce the height of ball by a factor of 2
MovieClip._width, MovieClip._yscale
| MovieClip.hitTest( ) Method | check whether a point is in a clip or two clips intersect |
Flash 5
mc.hitTest(x, y, shapeFlag) mc.hitTest(target)
The horizontal coordinate of the point to test.
The vertical coordinate of the point to test.
An optional Boolean value indicating whether the collision test should detect against the bounding box of mc (false) or the actual pixels of mc (true). Defaults to false if not supplied. Note that shapeFlag may be used only with the x and y arguments, not the target argument. It is meaningful only when mc has an irregular contour or a hole like a donut; it has no effect if mc is a solid rectangular object.
A string indicating the path to the movie clip to test for collision with mc. Because movie clip references are converted to paths when used in a string context, target may also be a movie clip object reference, as in mc.hitTest(ball) versus mc.hitTest("ball").
A Boolean indicating the result of the collision-detection test. The result is true under any of the following circumstances:
The point (x, y) on the main Stage intersects with any occupied pixel of mc. An occupied pixel is one that contains a visual element, such as a shape or text.
The shapeFlag property is false and the point (x, y) on the main Stage intersects with any pixel in the bounding box of mc. The bounding box of mc is the smallest rectangle that can encompass every occupied pixel of mc.
Any pixel in the bounding box of target intersects any pixel in the bounding box of mc.
The result is false under any of the following circumstances:
The shapeFlag property is true and the point (x, y) on the main Stage does not intersect with any occupied pixel of mc. An occupied pixel is one that contains a visual element, such as a shape or text.
The point (x, y) on the main Stage does not intersect with any pixel in the bounding box of mc. The bounding box of mc is the smallest rectangle that can encompass every occupied pixel of mc.
No pixels in the bounding box of target intersect with any pixel in the bounding box of mc.
The hitTest( ) method is used to determine whether a movie clip or specific point intersects with (i.e., "hits") mc.
When checking to see if a point intersects mc, we provide hitTest( ) with the x and y coordinates of the point to check (relative to the main Stage). We may also provide the optional shapeFlag argument, which indicates whether the collision test should use the actual pixels of mc, or just mc 's bounding box (the smallest rectangle that can encompass every occupied pixel of mc). Checking the actual pixels of mc allows us to determine whether the point (x, y) is an occupied pixel inside the contour of mc, not merely whether it is any point inside mc 's bounding box.
When we're checking to see if a movie clip intersects mc, we provide hitTest( ) with the target argument specifying the clip to check. Collision detection between target and mc always uses the bounding boxes of the clips; hitTest( ) does not support pixel-perfect clip-versus-clip detection. Manual pixel-perfect collision-detection routines can be difficult to create and processor-intensive to run. In many situations -- for example, a simple spaceship game -- it's common practice to detect against a bounding circle rather than exact pixels.
Note that collision is always tested relative to the location of mc on the main Stage of the Player. Therefore, when hitTest( ) is used with a single point, the arguments x and y should always describe a point using Stage coordinates. See MovieClip.localToGlobal( ) for information on converting clip coordinates to Stage coordinates. In clip-versus-clip detection, the coordinates of clips on different timelines are automatically converted to global (i.e., Stage) coordinates.
This example shows how to manually detect the intersection of two circles without using hitTest( ):
// Check the distance between two circular clips on both axes
var deltaX = clip1._x - clip2._x; // Horizontal distance
var deltaY = clip1._y - clip2._y; // Vertical distance
// Store the radius of each circle in a convenient property
var radius1 = clip1._width / 2;
var radius2 = clip2._width / 2;
// If the distance between the circles' centers squared is less
// than or equal to the total length of the two radii squared,
// an intersection occurs.
if ((deltaX * deltaX) + (deltaY * deltaY)
<= (radius1 + radius2) * (radius1 + radius2)) {
trace("intersecting");
} else {
trace("not intersecting");
}Here we check whether paddle intersects ball using hitTest( ):
if (paddle.hitTest("ball")) {
trace("The paddle hit the ball.");
}Here we check whether the mouse pointer is over an occupied pixel within tractor's contour. Notice that the coordinates of the pointer are given in relation to _root (the main Stage). Gaps in a movie clip are detectable when shapeFlag is true; for example, if the tractor uses empty space to represent its windows, then hitTest( ) will return false when the pointer is over a window:
if (tractor.hitTest(_root._xmouse, _root._ymouse, true)) {
trace("You're pointing to the tractor.");
}| MovieClip.loadMovie( ) Method | load an external .swf file into the Player |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 4)
mc.loadMovie(URL) mc.loadMovie(URL, method)
A string specifying the location of the external .swf file to load.
An optional string literal indicating the method by which to send variables to an external script. Must be either the literal "GET" or "POST"; no other expression is allowed.
The MovieClip.loadMovie( ) method is an alternative to the global loadMovie( ) function. When invoked as a MovieClip( ) method, loadMovie( ) takes no target parameter; it loads the .swf at URL into mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global loadMovie( ) function.
loadMovie( ); Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip.loadVariables( ) Method | retrieve an external set of variables |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 4 and later)
mc.loadVariables(URL) mc.loadVariables(URL, method)
A string specifying the path to one of two variable sources: a script that produces variables as output or a text file containing variables.
An optional string literal indicating the method by which to send the variables from mc to an external script. If specified, variables are both sent and loaded. If omitted, variables are loaded only. Must be either the literal "GET" or "POST"; no other expression is allowed.
The MovieClip.loadVariables( ) method is an alternative to the global loadVariables( ) function. When invoked as a MovieClip method, loadVariables( ) takes no target parameter; it loads the variables at URL into mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global loadVariables( ) function.
loadVariables( ); Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip.localToGlobal( ) Method | convert a point in a clip to main Stage coordinates |
Flash 5
mc.localToGlobal(point)
A reference to an object with two properties, x and y, that describe a point in mc's coordinate space. Both x and y may be any floating-point number.
The localToGlobal( ) method converts the x and y properties of point from coordinates given in mc 's coordinate space to coordinates on the main Stage of the Player. Note that localToGlobal( ) does not return a new object, it merely modifies the existing x and y values of point.
To use localToGlobal( ), we must first create a so-called point or coordinates object with x and y properties. To do so, we'll simply create a generic object from the Object class, and add x and y properties to it:
myPoint = new Object( ); myPoint.x = 10; myPoint.y = 20;
The x and y properties of our object are positions on the horizontal and vertical axes of mc, relative to mc 's registration point (shown as a crosshair in mc 's Library symbol). For example, an x of 10 is 10 pixels to the right of mc 's registration point, and a y of 20 is 20 pixels below mc 's registration point. With our object created and our x and y properties set, we then pass the object to the localToGlobal( ) method, as in:
myClip.localToGlobal(myPoint);
When localToGlobal( ) is executed, the values of myPoint's x and y properties are transformed to represent the corresponding point on the main Stage, measured from the Stage's upper-left corner. By examining the new values of our myPoint object's properties, we answer the question "Where does the point (x, y) of the movie clip appear on the main Stage?" For example:
mainX = myPoint.x; mainY = myPoint.y;
The following example determines the location of a clip's registration point relative to the main Stage:
pt = new Object( );
pt.x = 0; // Horizontal registration point of clip
pt.y = 0; // Vertical registration point of clip
this.localToGlobal(pt); // Convert pt to main Stage coordinates
trace("On the main Stage, the registration point of the current clip is at: ");
trace("x: " + pt.x + "y: " + pt.y);The localToGlobal( ) method can be used to convert a point to Stage coordinates for use with the hitTest( ) method, which expects points to be supplied in the Stage's coordinate space. It can also be used to compare points in two different movie clips using a common coordinate space.
MovieClip.globalToLocal( ), MovieClip.hitTest( )
| MovieClip._name Property | the identifier of a clip instance, as a string |
Flash 4 and later
mc._name
Read/write
The _name property specifies the instance name of a movie clip instance as a string. Because it initially reflects the instance name set in the Instance panel during authoring, the _name property doesn't apply to main movies (the main movie is most easily referred to by the global property _root).
We can use _name to determine whether or not to perform some manipulation of a given clip, as we did when generating a series of star movie clips in Example 10-2.
The _name property may also be used to reassign the identifier of a clip. For example:
// Change ball to circle ball._name = "circle"; // Now control the former ball as circle circle._x = 500;
MovieClip._target, targetPath( ); Section 13.3.3, "Instance Names" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip.nextFrame( ) Method | advance a clip or movie's playhead one frame and stop it |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.nextFrame()
The MovieClip.nextFrame( ) method is an alternative to the global nextFrame( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or main movies specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global nextFrame( ) function.
// Advance slideshow one frame and stop the playhead slideshow.nextFrame( );
MovieClip.prevFrame( ), nextFrame( )
| MovieClip._parent Property | a reference to the host clip or movie containing this clip |
Flash 4 and later
mc._parent
Read-only
The _ parent property stores a reference to the clip object upon whose timeline mc resides. Main movies don't support the _ parent property because they are at the top level (conveniently referred to as _root). References to _root._ parent return undefined. The _parent property gives us the powerful ability to manipulate clips in relation to the current clip.
Though it is possible in Flash 5 to reassign the _ parent property to another clip, doing so has little purpose -- only the reference is changed, not the physical structure of the clips. This unintentional behavior will likely be changed in the future.
If mc resides on the main timeline of a movie, we can play the main timeline from mc using:
_parent.play( );
We may also set the parent timeline's properties, as in:
_parent._alpha = 50;
The _ parent property may also be used in succession; that is, we may access the _ parent of a _ parent, as follows:
_parent._parent.play( ); // Play the clip two clips above the current clip
_root; Section 13.5.3, "Referring to Nested Instances" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip.play( ) Method | begin the sequential display of frames in a clip or movie |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.play()
The MovieClip.play( ) method is an alternative to the global play( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or main movies specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global play( ) function.
// Begin playing clip intro intro.play( );
MovieClip.stop( ), play( )
| MovieClip.prevFrame( ) Method | send a clip or movie's playhead back one frame and stop it |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.prevFrame()
The MovieClip.prevFrame( ) method is an alternative to the global prevFrame( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or main movies specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global prevFrame( ) function.
// Rewind slideshow one frame and stop it slideshow.prevFrame( );
MovieClip.nextFrame( ), prevFrame( )
| MovieClip.removeMovieClip( ) Method | delete a movie clip from the Flash Player |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 4 and later)
mc.removeMovieClip()
The MovieClip.removeMovieClip( ) method is an alternative to the global removeMovieClip( ) function. When invoked as a MovieClip method, removeMovieClip( ) takes no target parameter; it removes mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global removeMovieClip( ) function.
duplicateMovieClip( ), MovieClip.attachMovie( ), MovieClip.duplicateMovieClip( ); Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip._rotation Property | rotation, in degrees, of a clip or movie |
Flash 4 and later
mc._rotation
Read/write
The floating-point _rotation property specifies the number of degrees mc is rotated from its original orientation (if mc is a clip, the original orientation is that of its symbol in the Library). Both authoring tool and programmatic adjustments are reflected in _rotation. Numbers in the range to 180.0 rotate the clip clockwise. Numbers in the range to -180.0 rotate the clip counter-clockwise. The same effect is achieved when rotating a clip n degrees or n-360 degrees (where n is positive). For example, there is no difference between rotating a clip +299.4 degrees or -60.6 degrees. Likewise, when n is negative, there is no difference between n degrees and n+360 degrees. For example, rotating a clip -90 degrees is the same as rotating it +270 degrees.
When _rotation is set to anything outside the range of -180 to 180, the value is brought into the proper range according to the following calculation:
x = newRotation % 360;
if (x > 180) {
x -= 360;
} else if (x < -180) {
x += 360;
}
_rotation = x;In the Flash 4 Player, setting the _rotation of a clip reduces the scale of that clip by a fractional amount. Over many _rotation settings, a clip will actually shrink noticeably. To account for this bug, set the _xscale and _ yscale of the clip to 100 whenever setting the _rotation.
Placing the following code on a clip causes the clip to rotate 5 degrees clockwise each time a frame is rendered:
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
_rotation += 5;
}| MovieClip.startDrag( ) Method | make a movie or movie clip follow the mouse |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 4 and later)
mc.startDrag() mc.startDrag(lockCenter) mc.startDrag(lockCenter, left, top, right, bottom)
A Boolean indicating whether the registration point of mc should be centered under the mouse pointer (true) or dragged relative to its original location (false).
A number specifying the x-coordinate to the left of which mc 's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the y-coordinate above which mc 's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the x-coordinate to the right of which mc 's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the y-coordinate below which mc 's registration point may not be dragged.
The MovieClip.startDrag( ) method is an alternative to the global startDrag( ) function. When invoked as a MovieClip method, startDrag( ) takes no target parameter; it drags mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global startDrag( ) function.
Note that the correct order of the constraining rectangular coordinates is left, top, right, bottom but that the Flash 5 ActionScript Dictionary lists them in the wrong order under MovieClip.startDrag( ).
// Button code to drag and drop the current clip or movie
on (press) {
this.startDrag(true);
}
on (release) {
stopDrag( );
}MovieClip.stopDrag( ), startDrag( ), stopDrag( ); Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip.stop( ) Method | pause a clip or movie |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 2 and later)
mc.stop()
The MovieClip.stop( ) method is an alternative to the global stop( ) function. Use the method form to control remote movie clips or main movies specified by mc.
For general usage instructions, see the global stop( ) function.
// Halt the playback of spinner spinner.stop( );
MovieClip.play( ), stop( )
| MovieClip.stopDrag( ) Method | end a drag operation in progress |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 4 and later)
mc.stopDrag()
The MovieClip.stopDrag( ) method is an alternative to the global stopDrag( ) function. However, there is no need to use the method form; stopDrag( ) cancels any drag operation in progress, whether invoked through a movie clip or as a global function.
MovieClip.startDrag( ), stopDrag( )
| MovieClip.swapDepths( ) Method | change the graphic layering of an instance in the instance stack |
Flash 5
mc.swapDepths(target) mc.swapDepths(depth)
A string indicating the path to the movie clip to be swapped with mc. Because movie clip references are converted to paths when used in a string context, target may also be a movie clip object reference, as in mc.swapDepths(window2) versus mc.swapDepths("window2").
An integer specifying a level in mc's parent's clip stack. A depth of -1 is below 0, 1 is in front of 0, 2 is in front of 1, and so on. See Section 13.4, "Movie and Instance Stacking Order" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips" for more details. Negative depths are functional, but not officially supported by ActionScript; to ensure future compatibility, use depths of 0 or greater.
All movie clip instances in a .swf document reside in a stack that governs the visual layering of instances in the Player. The stack is structured like a deck of cards; clips in higher positions in the stack appear in front of clips in lower positions. The position of an instance in the stack is initialized when the clip is created (either in the Flash authoring tool or via attachMovie( ) or duplicateMovieClip( ) ). Using swapDepths( ), we can change the position of an instance in the stack.
The swapDepths( ) method takes two forms. When used with a target argument, swapDepths( ) trades the stack position of mc and target, provided that mc and target share the same parent clip (reside on the same timeline). When used with a depth argument, swapDepths( ) places mc in a new position in mc's parent stack. If that position is occupied, the previous occupant is moved to mc's old position. Note that swapDepths( ) cannot be used to move a clip outside of the stack maintained by its parent. For information on how movies and movie clips are stacked in the Player, see Section 13.4, "Movie and Instance Stacking Order" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips".
Note that swapping a duplicated or attached instance with a manually created instance via the depth argument can cause redraw problems in the Flash 5 Player. Treat the depth argument with prudence, and always test depth-swapping code extensively.
Section 13.4, "Movie and Instance Stacking Order" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip._target Property | the target path of a clip or movie, in slash syntax |
Flash 4 and later
mc._target
Read-only
The _target property represents the path to mc in a Flash 4-style slash notation string. For example, if a clip, ball, resides on the main movie timeline, ball's _target property is "/ball". A clip, stripe, inside ball would have a _target of "/ball/stripe".
To retrieve a string giving the path to a clip in dot notation, use the targetPath( ) function.
targetPath( )
| MovieClip._totalframes Property | the total number of frames in a clip or movie timeline |
Flash 4 and later
mc._totalframes
Read-only
The integer _totalframes property represents the number of frames in mc's timeline, where mc is a movie clip or main movie. A new clip or main movie always has a _totalframes of 1. But if the contents of a clip are unloaded via unloadMovie( ), _totalframes becomes 0. It may also be momentarily while the current clip is unloaded before a new clip is loaded during a loadMovie( ) operation over a slow connection. The _totalframes property is most often used along with _frameloaded to create preloaders as shown in the entry for MovieClip._framesloaded.
MovieClip._framesloaded
| MovieClip.unloadMovie( ) Method | remove a movie or movie clip from the Player |
Method form introduced in Flash 5 (global form supported by Flash 3 and later)
mc.unloadMovie()
The MovieClip.unloadMovie() method is an alternative to the global unloadMovie() function. When invoked as a MovieClip method, unloadMovie() takes no target parameter; it unloads mc. The method syntax is less prone to user error than its global function counterpart.
For usage instructions, see the global unloadMovie( ) function.
// Removes a loaded document from level 1 _level1.unloadMovie( );
MovieClip.loadMovie( ), unloadMovie( ); Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| MovieClip._url Property | the network address from which a clip or movie was loaded |
Flash 4 and later
mc._url
Read-only
The _url property represents the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) indicating the Internet or local disk location from which the content of mc was loaded, as a string. The _url property is always an absolute URL, never a relative one. For main movies, _url is simply the location of the current .swf file. The _url of all movie clips in a .swf file is the same as the main movie of that file unless external .swf files have been loaded into individual clips via MovieClip.loadMovie( ). The _url of a clip that hosts an externally loaded .swf file is the location of the externally loaded file.
The _url property is sometimes used to create simple security systems that prevent a movie from playing when displayed in a unwanted location.
The value of _url in a movie loaded from a web site looks like this:
"http://www.moock.org/gwen/meetgwen.swf"
The value of _url in a movie loaded from a local PC hard drive looks like this:
"file:///C|/data/flashfiles/movie.swf"
Here we check whether a movie is hosted in the desired location (if not, we display a frame that contains an error):
if (_url != "http://www.moock.org/gwen/meetgwen.swf") {
trace ("This movie is not running from its intended location.";
gotoAndStop("accessDenied");
}MovieClip.loadMovie( )
| MovieClip.valueOf( ) Method | the path of a clip or movie, as a string |
Flash 5
mc.valueOf()
A string containing the full path to mc, using dot syntax. For example:
"_level1.ball" "_level0" "_level0.shoppingcart.product1"
The valueOf( ) method returns a string representing the absolute path to mc using dot syntax notation. The valueOf( ) method is automatically invoked whenever a MovieClip object is used where a string is called for. For example, trace(mc) will generate the same result as trace(mc.valueOf( )). It is, therefore, rarely necessary to invoke valueOf( ) explicitly.
Object.valueOf( ), targetPath( )
| MovieClip._visible Property | whether a clip or movie is shown or hidden |
Flash 4 and later
mc._visible
Read/write
The Boolean _visible property indicates whether mc is currently shown (true) or hidden (false). We use _visible as a quick means of hiding a movie clip or movie from view. Note that hidden clips may still be controlled via ActionScript and still play, stop, receive events, and otherwise operate as normal. Hidden clips are simply not displayed on screen.
The initial value of the _visible property for all movie clips is true, even for movie clips that are fully transparent or completely off stage. The _visible property changes only when deliberately modified by a script; think of it as a way to programmatically show and hide clips, not a reflection of all factors such as position and transparency that can affect a clip's visibility.
Hiding a movie clip using the _visible property is preferred to setting it to fully transparent or moving it off stage because the Flash Player does not attempt to draw the graphics in movie clips with _visible set to false, thus improving rendering performance.
The following button code hides the current clip when the button is depressed and reveals it when the button is released:
on (press) {
this._visible = false;
}
on (release) {
this._visible = true;
}MovieClip._alpha
| MovieClip._ width Property | width of a clip or movie, in pixels |
Flash 4; enhanced in Flash 5
mc._width
Read-only in Flash 4; read/write in Flash 5
The floating-point _width property stores a non-negative number specifying the current width of mc, in pixels. If mc has no content, _width is 0. The _width property measures the content of a clip or movie as the distance between the leftmost occupied pixel and the rightmost occupied pixel, even if there is empty space between those pixels. An occupied pixel is a pixel that contains a shape, graphic, button, movie clip, or other content element. Changes made to a clip's width in the authoring tool or via _xscale are reflected by _width.
We may set the value of _width in order to horizontally resize a movie clip. Attempts to set _width to a negative value are ignored. Setting a clip's _width to does not hide the clip, it turns it into a one-pixel vertical line.
The _width of the main movie (either
_root._width or
_leveln._width)
is not the Stage width as specified under Modify Movie
Dimensions in the authoring tool but rather the width of the contents
of the main movie. There is no explicit Stage width property; if
required, we must provide the Stage width manually as a variable. For
example, if a movie's Stage has a width of 550, we could add
the following variable:
_root.stageWidth = 550;
To make that value available on the timeline of any clip, use:
Object.prototype.stageWidth = 550;
Note that when we set the width of a movie clip, lines are scaled proportionally, losing their original point size as set in the Stroke panel. However, the point size of lines set to Hairline in the Stroke panel is not scaled when a movie clip is resized. That is, use hairlines to prevent your strokes from appearing fat or distorted when a clip is scaled.
ball._width = 20; // Set the width of ball to 20 pixels ball._width *= 2; // Double the width of ball
MovieClip._height, MovieClip._xscale
| MovieClip._x Property | horizontal location of a clip or movie, in pixels |
Flash 4 and later
mc._x
Read/write
The floating-point _x property always indicates the horizontal position of mc's registration point, but it is measured relative to one of three possible coordinate spaces:
If mc resides on the main timeline, _x is measured relative to the Stage's left edge. For example, an _x of 20 would indicate that the registration point of mc is 20 pixels to the right of the Stage's left edge; -20 would indicate 20 pixels to the left.
If mc resides on another movie clip instance's timeline, _x is measured relative to the registration point of that parent instance. For example, an _x of 20 would indicate that the registration point of mc is 20 pixels to the right of its parent instance's registration point; -20 would indicate 20 pixels to the left.
If mc is the main movie, _x is the horizontal offset of the entire .swf document relative to the Stage's left edge. For example, an _x of 200 would indicate that the contents of the Stage are offset 200 pixels to the right of their author-time position; -200 would indicate 200 pixels to the left.
The _x property (along with all horizontal coordinates in Flash) increases to the right and decreases to the left. Fractional _x values are approximated in Flash with antialiasing (blurring).
If mc is contained by an instance that is scaled and/or rotated, the coordinate space it inhabits is also scaled and/or rotated. For example, if mc's parent is scaled by 200% and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, _x will increase in the downward direction rather than to the right, and a single unit of _x will actually be 2 pixels instead of 1.
Because switching between instance and main movie coordinate spaces can be cumbersome, the MovieClip object provides the localToGlobal( ) and globalToLocal( ) methods for performing coordinate-space transformations.
Placing the following code on a clip causes it to move 5 pixels to the right with each passing frame (assuming that its coordinate space hasn't been altered by transformations to its parent):
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
_x += 5;
}Positioning clips via _x and _y is a fundamental task in visual ActionScript programming. The following example shows clip event handlers that cause a clip to follow the mouse at a fixed rate of speed (many other motion samples may be obtained from the online Code Depot):
// Make a clip follow the mouse
onClipEvent(load) {
this.speed = 10;
// Moves clip toward the point (leaderX, leaderY)
function follow (clip, leaderX, leaderY) {
// Move only if we're not at the destination
if (clip._x != leaderX || clip._y != leaderY) {
// Determine the distance between clip and leader
var deltaX = clip._x - leaderX;
var deltaY = clip._y - leaderY;
var dist = Math.sqrt((deltaX * deltaX) + (deltaY * deltaY));
// Allocate speed between X and Y axes
var moveX = clip.speed * (deltaX / dist);
var moveY = clip.speed * (deltaY / dist);
// If the clip has enough speed to overshoot the destination,
// just go to the destination. Otherwise move according to
// the clip's speed.
if (clip.speed >= dist) {
clip._x = leaderX;
clip._y = leaderY;
} else {
clip._x -= moveX;
clip._y -= moveY;
}
}
}
}
onClipEvent(enterframe) {
follow(this, _root._xmouse, _root._ymouse);
}MovieClip.globalToLocal( ), MovieClip.localToGlobal( ), MovieClip._y
| MovieClip._xmouse Property | horizontal location of the mouse pointer |
Flash 5
mc._xmouse
Read-only
The floating-point _xmouse property indicates the horizontal location of the mouse pointer's hotspot relative to the coordinate space of mc. If mc is a main movie, _xmouse is measured from the Stage's left edge. If mc is an instance, _xmouse is measured from the instance's registration point. To obtain a consistent _xmouse coordinate that is always measured relative to the Stage, use _root._xmouse.
Placing the following code on a clip causes it to mirror the mouse pointer's horizontal position relative to the Stage (it moves left and right in a straight line):
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
_x = _root._xmouse;
}MovieClip._ ymouse
| MovieClip._xscale Property | width of a clip or movie, as a percentage |
Flash 4 and later
mc._xscale
Read/write
The floating-point _xscale property specifies the width of mc relative to its original width, expressed as a percentage. If mc is an instance, its "original width" is the width of the instance's symbol in the Library. If mc is a main movie, its "original width" is the width of the movie at authoring time.
When the current width of mc is the same as its original width, _xscale is 100. An _xscale of 200 doubles mc's width relative to its original width. An _xscale of 50 halves mc's width relative to its original width.
The _xscale property scales a clip about its registration point (proportionately on the right and left sides of the clip's registration point). To size a clip from one side only, place all of the clip's content on one side of the registration point in the clip's symbol (this is a useful technique for creating horizontal preloader bars). When a clip's _xscale is set to a negative value, the clip is flipped horizontally as if across a vertical mirror running through its registration point (i.e., it becomes a mirror image of itself), after which the negative value is treated as a positive. To flip a clip horizontally without resizing it, set the clip's _xscale to -100.
// Double the width of ball (the height remains unchanged) ball._xscale *= 2; // Create a mirror image of ball ball._xscale = -100;
MovieClip._ yscale
| MovieClip._y Property | vertical location of a clip or movie, in pixels |
Flash 4 and later
mc._y
Read/write
The floating-point _ y property always indicates the vertical position of mc 's registration point, but it is measured relative to one of three possible coordinate spaces.
If mc resides on the main timeline, _ y is measured relative to the Stage's top edge. For example, a _ y of 20 would indicate that the registration point of mc is 20 pixels below the Stage's top edge; -20 would indicate 20 pixels above.
If mc resides on another movie clip instance's timeline, _ y is measured relative to the registration point of that parent instance. For example, a _ y of 20 would indicate that the registration point of mc is 20 pixels below its parent instance's registration point; -20 would indicate 20 pixels above.
If mc is the main movie, _ y is the vertical offset of the entire .swf document relative to the Stage's top edge. For example, a _ y of 200 would indicate that the contents of the Stage are offset 200 pixels below their author-time position; -200 would indicate 200 pixels above.
The _ y property (along with all vertical coordinates in Flash) increases downward and decreases upward -- the opposite of the Cartesian coordinate system. Fractional _ y values are approximated in Flash with antialiasing (blurring).
If mc is contained by an instance that is scaled and/or rotated, the coordinate space it inhabits is also scaled and/or rotated. For example, if mc's parent is scaled by 200% and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, _ y will increase toward the left rather than downward, and a single unit of _ y will actually be 2 pixels instead of 1.
Because switching between instance and main movie coordinate spaces can be cumbersome, the MovieClip object provides the localToGlobal( ) and globalToLocal( ) methods for performing coordinate-space transformations.
Placing the following code on a clip causes the clip to move down 5 pixels with each passing frame (assuming that its coordinate space hasn't been altered by transformations to its parent):
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
_y += 5;
}MovieClip.globalToLocal( ), MovieClip.localToGlobal( ), MovieClip._x
| MovieClip._ymouse Property | vertical location of the mouse pointer |
Flash 5
mc._ymouse
Read-only
The floating-point _ ymouse property indicates the vertical location of the mouse pointer's hotspot relative to the coordinate space of mc. If mc is a main movie, _ ymouse is measured from the Stage's top edge. If mc is an instance, _ ymouse is measured from the instance's registration point. To obtain a consistent _ ymouse coordinate that is always measured relative to the Stage, use _root._ ymouse.
Placing the following code on a clip causes it to mirror the mouse pointer's vertical position relative to the Stage (it moves up and down in a straight line):
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
_y = _root._ymouse;
}MovieClip._xmouse
| MovieClip._ yscale Property | height of a clip or movie, as a percentage |
Flash 4 and later
mc._yscale
Read/write
The floating-point _ yscale property specifies the height of mc relative to its original height, expressed as a percentage. If mc is an instance, its "original height" is the height of the instance's symbol in the Library. If mc is a main movie, the "original height" is the height of the movie at authoring time.
When the current height of mc is the same as its original height, _ yscale is 100. A _ yscale of 200 doubles mc's height relative to its original height. A _ yscale of 50 halves mc's height relative to its original height.
The _ yscale property scales a clip about its registration point (proportionately above and below the clip's registration point). To size a clip from above or below only, place all of the clip's content above or below the registration point in the clip's symbol (this is a useful technique for creating vertical preloader bars). When a clip's _ yscale is set to a negative value, the clip is flipped vertically as if across a horizontal mirror running through its registration point (i.e., it becomes a vertical mirror image of itself), after which the negative value is treated as a positive. To flip a clip vertically without resizing it, set the clip's _ yscale to -100.
// Double the height of ball (the width remains unchanged) ball._yscale *= 2; // Flip ball vertically ball._yscale = -100;
MovieClip._xscale
| NaN Global Property | constant representing invalid numeric data (Not-a-Number) |
Flash 5
NaN
Read-only
NaN is a special numeric constant used to represent invalid numeric data (NaN is an acronym for "Not-a-Number"). Numeric operations that cannot be resolved to a legitimate number yield the value NaN. For example:
Math.sqrt(-1); // An imaginary number that cannot be represented 15 - "coffee cup"; // "coffee cup" cannot be converted to a number.
Note that NaN is still numeric data, even though it is not a calculable number:
typeof NaN; // Yields "number"
The value NaN is hardly ever used directly in source code but rather serves as a way for an operation to return an error condition. Because NaN does not compare equal to itself, the only way you can detect it is with the global function isNaN( ). NaN is shorthand for Number.NaN.
isNaN( ), Number.NaN; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| newline Constant | insert a line break |
Flash 4 and later
newline
A newline character.
The constant newline represents a standard line break character (ASCII 10). It is synonymous with the escape sequence "\n" and is used to force a line break in a block of text (usually for display in a text field variable).
Though newline was a function in Flash 4, it became a constant in Flash 5 and has a syntax that resembles a property or variable. Note that parentheses are not used following newline.
myOutput = "hello" + newline + "world";
See Section 4.5.2.2, "Escape sequences" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| nextFrame( ) Global Function | advance a movie or movie clip's playhead one frame and stop it |
Flash 2 and later
nextFrame()
The nextFrame( ) function moves the playhead of the current timeline ahead one frame and stops it there. The "current timeline" is the timeline from which the nextFrame( ) function is invoked. The nextFrame( ) function is synonymous with gotoAndStop(_currentFrame + 1);. If invoked on the last frame of a timeline, nextFrame( ) simply stops the playhead on that frame unless another scene follows the current scene, in which case nextFrame( ) moves the playhead to frame 1 of the next scene.
gotoAndStop( ), MovieClip.nextFrame( ), nextScene( ), prevFrame( )
| nextScene( ) Global Function | advance a movie's playhead to frame 1 of the next scene |
Flash 2 and later
nextScene()
The nextScene( ) function moves the main playhead of a movie to frame 1 of the scene following the current scene and stops the main movie timeline. The "current scene" is the scene from which the nextScene( ) function is invoked. It must be invoked on a scene's main timeline in order to have an effect; that is, nextScene( ) does not work inside a movie clip or onClipEvent( ) handler. If invoked from the last scene in a movie, nextScene( ) sends the playhead to frame 1 of that scene and halts movie playback.
nextFrame( ), prevScene( )
| Number( ) Global Function | convert a value to the Number datatype |
Flash 5
Number(value)
An expression containing the value to be converted to a number.
The result of converting value to a primitive number.
The Number( ) function converts its argument to a primitive numeric value and returns that converted value. The results of converting various types of data to a primitive number are described in Table 3-1. It's often not necessary to use the Number( ) function; ActionScript automatically converts values to the number type when appropriate.
Be sure not to confuse the global Number( ) function with the Number class constructor. The former is a function that converts a value to the number type, whereas the latter is the class used to wrap a primitive numeric datum in an object that can take properties and methods.
Note that the Number( ) function frequently appears in Flash 4 .fla files that have been converted to the Flash 5 format. For information on how datatypes are handled when Flash 4 files are converted to Flash 5, see Section 3.4.4, "Flash 4-to-Flash 5 Datatype Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes".
The Number class, parseFloat( ), parseInt( ); Section 3.4.2, "Explicit Type Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes"
| Number Class | wrapper class for primitive numeric data |
Flash 5
new Number(value)
An expression to be resolved and, if necessary, converted to a numeric value, then wrapped in a Number object.
The following properties are accessed directly as properties of the Number class, using Number.propertyName. To access them you do not need to instantiate a new Number object (i.e., there is no need for the constructor function). Some of these properties, such as NaN don't even require the Number.propertyName notation. You can simply use NaN as shorthand for Number.NaN (details for each property follow later).
The largest representable positive number in ActionScript.
The smallest representable positive number in ActionScript.
Special Not-a-Number value indicating invalid numeric data.
Any number more negative than -MAX_VALUE.
Any number larger than MAX_VALUE.
Convert a number to a string.
The Number class has two purposes:
It gives us access to built-in properties that represent special numeric values -- MIN_VALUE, MIN_VALUE, NaN, NEGATIVE_INFINITY, and POSITIVE_INFINITY -- that can be used to check whether numeric data is valid.
It can be used to convert between different number systems, such as base-10 (decimal) and base-16 (hexadecimal). Refer to Number.toString( ) method.
There is no need to create a new Number object if you simply want to access the numeric properties it defines. In fact, where applicable, it is easier to use global property equivalents (NaN, Infinity, and -Infinity). Frankly, it is rare that you'll need the Number class properties at all.
On the other hand, the Number class's toString( ) method is used with an instantiated Number object. However, the interpreter takes care of creating a Number object for us whenever we invoke a method on a primitive numeric value. For example:
x = 102;
x.toString(16); // x is automatically converted to a Number object
// for the sake of this operation.You might do this in order to, say, use toString( ) to convert between various number systems. Again, frankly, this is a fairly rare task, so you probably won't be using the Number class much.
The Math object; Section 4.1, "The Number Type" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.MAX_VALUE Property | the largest representable positive number in ActionScript |
Flash 5
Number.MAX_VALUE
Read-only
The MAX_VALUE property stores the largest representable positive number in ActionScript (1.7976931348623157e+308). It is convenient when you'd like to start with a very large value, as shown in the following example. Any number greater than MAX_VALUE can't be represented by ActionScript and is therefore considered to be POSITIVE_INFINITY.
Here we are looking for a minimum value in an array. We initialize the minVal variable to MAX_VALUE, knowing that any subsequent value will be less than it:
var myArray = [-10, 12, 99]
var minVal = Number.MAX_VALUE
for (thisValue in myArray) {
if (myArray[thisValue] < minVal) {
minVal = myArray[thisValue];
}
}
trace ("The minimum value is " + minVal);Number.MIN_VALUE; Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.MIN_VALUE Property | the smallest representable positive number in ActionScript |
Flash 5
Number.MIN_VALUE
Read-only
The MIN_VALUE property stores the smallest representable positive number in ActionScript, 5e-324 (not to be confused with -Number.MAX_VALUE, the most-negative number allowed in ActionScript).
Number.MAX_VALUE; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.NaN Property | constant representing invalid numeric data (Not-a-Number) |
Flash 5
Number.NaN
Read-only
The NaN property stores the special "invalid number" value of the number datatype. It is used to represent the result of an illogical mathematical calculation (e.g., 0/0) or an attempted data conversion that does not yield a legitimate number.
Number.NaN is normally used in its more convenient global property form, NaN.
The value NaN is hardly ever used directly in source code but rather serves as a way for an operation to return an error condition. The only way you can detect NaN is with the global function isNaN( ).
isNaN( ), NaN; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.NEGATIVE_INFINITY Property | constant representing any number more negative than -Number.MAX_VALUE |
Flash 5
Number.NEGATIVE_INFINITY
Read-only
The NEGATIVE_INFINITY property stores a special numeric value used to represent values more negative than -Number.MAX_VALUE (the most-negative number representable in ActionScript). This is known as an underflow condition and is typically caused by a mathematical error.
Number.NEGATIVE_INFINITY is normally used in its more convenient global property form, -Infinity.
-Infinity, isFinite( ), Number.MAX_VALUE; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY Property | constant representing any number greater than Number.MAX_VALUE |
Flash 5
Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY
Read-only
The POSITIVE_INFINITY property stores a special numeric value used to represent values greater than Number.MAX_VALUE (the largest number representable in ActionScript). This is known as an overflow condition and is usually caused by some sort of mathematical error.
Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY is normally used in its more convenient global property form, Infinity.
if (score == Number.POSITIVE_INFINITY) {
trace ("You've achieved the highest possible score.");
}Infinity, isFinite( ), Number.MAX_VALUE; Section 4.3.3, "Special Values of the Number Datatype" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Number.toString( ) Method | convert a Number to a string |
Flash 5
numberObject.toString(radix)
An integer between 2 and 36 specifying the base of the number system used to represent numberObject in string format. This argument is optional; if omitted, it defaults to 10.
The value of numberObject converted to a string.
The toString( ) method retrieves the value of a Number object, converts that value to a string, and returns that string. We may use the radix argument to convert numeric values between different bases (e.g., binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal). The letters A-Z are used to represent digits with the value 10-35, respectively, although ordinarily only A through F are used (to represent the hex digits equivalent to 10 through 15).
To use Number.toString( ) with a primitive numeric value, surround the value with parentheses, as in:
(204).toString(16);
x = new Number(255); trace(x.toString( )); // Displays: "255" (i.e., decimal) trace(x.toString(16)); // Displays: "ff" (i.e., hexadecimal) trace(x.toString(2)); // Displays: "11111111" (i.e., binary) // Convert a hex literal to decimal trace((0xFFFFFF).toString(10)); // Displays: "16777215"
Number ( ), Object.toString( ), parseInt( ); See Section 4.3.1, "Integer Literals" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| Object Class | the basis for all other classes and for generic objects |
Flash 5
new Object()
A reference to the class constructor function used to create the object.
A reference to the prototype property of the object's constructor function.
Convert the value of the object to a string.
Retrieve the primitive value of the object, if one exists.
The Object class is the base class of the ActionScript object model. Object is used for two general purposes: (a) as a constructor for creating new, generic objects, and (b) as a superclass upon which to base new classes. All classes in ActionScript, whether user-defined or built-in are descendants of the Object class. All objects of all classes therefore inherit the properties of Object (though some classes override those properties).
To create a generic object of the Object class directly in our code without using a constructor, we can use an object literal just as we might use a string literal or an array literal. An object literal is a series of comma-separated property name/value pairs, enclosed in curly braces. Here's the general syntax:
{ property1: value1, property2: value2, property3: value3 }The names of properties in an object literal must be legal identifiers as described in Chapter 14, "Lexical Structure". The values may be any valid expression. For example:
// An object literal with two numeric properties
myObject = { x: 30, y: 23 };
// Set the x property value using a complex expression
myOtherObject = { x: Math.floor(Math.random( ) * 50 + 1) };Because object literals always create generic, anonymous objects, they are used only when we need object-formatted data temporarily, such as when, say, invoking Sound.setTransform( ), Color.setTransform( ), or MovieClip.localToGlobal( ).
| Object.constructor Property | a reference to the class constructor function used to create the object |
Flash 5
someObject.constructor
Read/write (overwriting an object's constructor property is not recommended as it alters the natural structure of class inheritance).
The constructor property stores a reference to the constructor function that was used to create someObject. For example, the constructor property of a Date object is the Date constructor function:
now = new Date( ); now.constructor == Date; // Yields true
Section 12.5.3.3, "The constructor property" in Chapter 12, "Objects and Classes"
| Object.__proto__ Property | a reference to the object's constructor's prototype property |
Flash 5
someObject.__ proto__
Read/write (Overwriting an object's __ proto__ property is not recommended as it alters the natural structure of class inheritance.)
The __ proto__ property stores a reference to the automatically-assigned prototype property of someObject's constructor function, which is used to transfer properties down through a class hierarchy. An object's __ proto__ property is mostly used internally by the interpreter to look up inherited properties for an object, but we can also use it to determine the class of an object, as shown in Example 12-6 and Example 12-9. Note that __ proto__ begins and ends with two underscore characters.
Section 12.5.3.4, "The _ _ proto_ _ property" in Chapter 12, "Objects and Classes"
| Object.toString( ) Method | the value of the object, as a string |
Flash 5
someObject.toString()
An internally defined string that describes or otherwise represents the object.
The toString( ) method returns a string description for someObject. By default, someObject.toString( ) returns the expression:
"[object " + class + "]"
where class is the internally defined name of the class to which someObject belongs. The ActionScript interpreter automatically invokes the toString( ) method whenever someObject is used in a string context. For example:
x = new Object( ); trace(x); // Displays: "[object Object]"
Most classes overwrite the default toString( ) method of Object in order to provide more meaningful information about each member of the class. For example, the Date.toString( ) method returns the date and time, and the Array.toString( ) method returns a comma-separated list of array elements. We may do the same when constructing our own classes.
This example shows how to provide a custom toString( ) method for the Ball class that we created in Chapter 12, "Objects and Classes":
// Add a Custom toString() method
// Make the Ball constructor
function Ball (radius, color, xPosition, yPosition) {
this.radius = radius;
this.color = color;
this.xPosition = xPosition;
this.yPosition = yPosition;
}
// Assign a function literal to the Ball class prototype's toString() method
Ball.prototype.toString = function ( ) {
return "A ball with the radius " + this.radius;
};
// Create a new ball object
myBall = new Ball(6, 0x00FF00, 145, 200);
// Now check myBall's string value
trace(myBall); // Displays: "A ball with the radius 6"Array.toString( ), Date.toString( ), Number.toString( ), Object.valueOf( )
| Object.valueOf( ) Method | the primitive value of the object |
Flash 5
someObject.valueOf()
The internally defined primitive value of someObject, if a primitive value is associated with someObject. If no primitive value is associated with someObject, then someObject itself is returned.
The valueOf( ) method returns the primitive datum associated with an object, if such an association exists. This method is mostly commonly used with objects of the Number, String, and Boolean classes, which all have associated primitive data. The MovieClip.valueOf( ) method returns a string representing the path to the clip.
Note that it's rarely necessary to invoke valueOf( ) explicitly; it is automatically invoked by the interpreter whenever someObject is used where a primitive is expected.
Boolean.valueOf( ), MovieClip.valueOf( ), Number.valueOf( ), Object.toString( ), String.valueOf( )
| parseFloat( ) Global Function | extract a floating-point number from a string |
Flash 5
parseFloat(stringExpression)
The string from which a floating-point number is to be extracted.
The extracted floating-point number. Or, if extraction was unsuccessful, the special numeric value NaN.
The parseFloat( ) function converts a string to a floating-point number (a number with a fractional portion). It works only with strings that contain a valid string representation of a floating-point number; otherwise, NaN is returned. The string must be of the following form:
Optional leading whitespace
Optional sign indicator + or -
At least one digit from 0-9 and an optional decimal point
Optional exponent starting with e or E followed by integer exponent
Trailing characters that cannot be parsed as part of the preceding numeric form are ignored.
Because user input data entered into text fields always belongs to the string datatype, we often use parseFloat( ) to extract numeric data from user-entered text. Note that parseFloat( ) can extract numbers from strings that contain both numbers and non-numeric characters, whereas Number( ) cannot.
parseFloat("14.5 apples"); // Yields 14.5
parseFloat(".123"); // Yields 0.123
var x = "15, 4, 23, 9";
parseFloat(x); // Yields 15isNaN( ), NaN, Number( ), parseInt( ); Section 3.4.2, "Explicit Type Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes"; Section 4.2, "Integers and Floating-Point Numbers" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| parseInt( ) Global Function | extract an integer from a string or convert numbers to base-10. |
Flash 5
parseInt(stringExpression) parseInt(stringExpression, radix)
The string from which an integer is to be extracted.
An optional integer, between 2 and 36, specifying the base (or radix) of the integer to be extracted. If not specified, the default radix depends on the contents of stringExpression (as described later).
The extracted integer value, as a base-10 number regardless of the original radix. Or, if extraction was unsuccessful, the special numeric value NaN.
The parseInt( ) function converts a string expression to an integer. It works only with strings that contain a valid string representation of an integer using the specified radix. The string must be of the following form:
Optional leading whitespace
Optional + or -
One or more digits that are valid in the number system of the specified radix
Trailing characters that cannot be parsed as part of the preceding numeric form are ignored.
The number derived from the supplied string starts with the first nonblank character in the string and ends with the character before the first character that is not a legitimate digit in the supplied radix. For example, in the base-10 system, the letter F is not a valid digit, so the following expression yields the number 2:
parseInt("2F", 10);But in the base-16 system (hexadecimal), the characters A, B, C, D, E, and F are valid numerals, so the following expression yields the number 47:
parseInt("2F", 16); // 2F in hexadecimal is 47 in base-10The radix argument of parseInt( ) specifies the base of the number as it exists in the string. In other words, using the radix argument we may say to the interpreter "Treat this string as a base-16 number" or "Treat this string as a base-2 number."
parseInt( ) also interprets the prefix 0x to indicate a hexadecimal (a.k.a. hex) number (as if a radix of 16 was specified) and a leading to indicate an octal number (as if a radix of 8 was specified):
parseInt("0xFF"); // Parsed as hex, yields 255
parseInt("FF", 16); // Parsed as hex, yields 255
parseInt("0377"); // Parsed as octal, yields 255 = (3 * 64) + (7 * 8) + (7 * 1)
parseInt("377", 8); // Parsed as octal, yields 255An explicit radix overrides any implicit radix:
parseInt ("0xFF", 10) // Parsed as decimal, yields 0
parseInt ("0x15", 10) // Parsed as decimal, yields 0 (not 15, and not 21)
parseInt ("0377", 10) // Parsed as decimal, yields 377Note that the parseInt( ) function extracts integer values only, unlike parseFloat( ) which can also extract fractional values but may be used only with base-10 numbers.
We primarily use parseInt( ) to extract integers from a string that contains both numbers and text or to remove the decimal place from a number (similar to Math.floor( )).
parseInt("Wow, 20 people were there"); // Yields NaN
parseInt("20 people were there"); // Yields 20
parseInt("1001", 2); // Yields 9 (1001 evaluated in binary)
parseInt(1.5); // Yields 1 (the number 1.5 is converted to the string
// "1.5" before the parseInt operation proceeds)Math.floor( ), NaN, parseFloat( ); Section 3.4.2, "Explicit Type Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes"; Section 4.2, "Integers and Floating-Point Numbers" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| play( ) Global Function | begin the sequential display of frames in a movie |
Flash 2 and later
play()
Invoking the play( ) function initiates the
sequential display of the frames in the current main movie or movie
clip. The "current" movie or movie clip is the one that
bears the play( ) function invocation statement.
Frames are displayed at a rate dictated by the frames per second (or
FPS) setting of the entire movie, which is set under the Movie
Properties (Modify Movie Frame Rate).
Once started, the playback of a movie or movie clip continues until
another function invocation specifically stops the playback. All
movie clips loop (begin playing again at frame 1) when the playhead
reaches the end of the timeline. In a browser, however, main movies
loop only if the code used to embed the movie in the HTML page
specifies that the movie should loop, as determined by the
LOOP attribute. (If you're using the Publish
command to embed your movie in an HTML page, set the
LOOP attribute by selecting File Publish
Settings HTML Playback Loop.)
gotoAndPlay( ), MovieClip.play( ), stop( )
| prevFrame( ) Global Function | send a movie's playhead back one frame and stop it |
Flash 2 and later
prevFrame()
The prevFrame( ) function moves the playhead of the current timeline back one frame and stops it there. The "current timeline" is the timeline from which the prevFrame( ) function is invoked. The prevFrame( ) function is synonymous with gotoAndStop(_currentFrame - 1);. If invoked on the first frame of a timeline, prevFrame( ) simply stops the playhead on that frame unless another scene precedes the current scene, in which case prevFrame( ) moves the playhead to the last frame of the previous scene.
gotoAndStop( ), MovieClip.prevFrame( ), nextFrame( ), prevScene( )
| prevScene( ) Global Function | send a movie's playhead to frame 1 of the previous scene |
Flash 2 and later
prevScene()
The prevScene( ) function moves the main playhead of a movie to frame 1 of the scene before the current scene and stops the main movie timeline. The "current scene" is the scene from which the prevScene( ) function is invoked. It must be invoked on a scene's main timeline in order to have an effect; that is, prevScene( ) does not work inside a movie clip or onClipEvent( ) handler. If invoked from the first scene in a movie, prevScene( ) sends the playhead to frame 1 of that scene and halts movie playback.
nextScene( ), prevFrame( )
| print( ) Global Function | print the frames of a movie or movie clip using vectors |
Flash 5
print(target, boundingBox)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie clip or document level to print (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
A string indicating how the printed frames of target should be cropped when printed. Cropping is defined by a bounding box that represents the entire printed page. The region of target included in the printed page can be set using one of three legal values for boundingBox (which must be a literal string):
The bounding box for each printed frame is set individually to match the size of each frame's contents. Hence, every printed frame's content is scaled to fill the entire printed page.
The area occupied by the content of all printed frames is combined to form a general bounding box. Each printed frame's content is scaled and placed on the printed page relative to the general bounding box.
The bounding box for all printed frames is set to the size of a single, designated frame in the target clip. Content of printed frames is cropped to the bounding box of that designated frame. To designate a frame as the bounding box, assign it the label #b.
Printing a Flash movie using a web browser's built-in print function behaves inconsistently and often results in poor quality printouts. Using the print( ) function, we can print the contents of a movie with accuracy and quality, directly from Flash. By default, print( ) causes all of the frames of target's timeline to be sent to the printer, one frame per page, cropped according to the boundingBox argument. To designate only specific frames for printing, we assign the label #P to the desired frames.
The print( ) function sends vectors directly to PostScript printers and vectors converted to bitmaps to non-PostScript printers. Because print( ) uses vectors, it cannot be used to print movies with alpha transparency or color transformations. To print movies that have color effects, use printAsBitmap( ).
In Flash 4 r20 and above, the features of the various Flash 5 print( ) functions are available as a modified getURL( ) Action. For more details, see Macromedia's Flash Printing SDK, available at:
http://www.macromedia.com/software/flash/open/webprinting/authoring.html
// Print every frame in the main movie timeline,
// sizing each individually to fill the page
print("_root", "bframe");
// Print every frame in the main movie timeline,
// sizing each frame relative to the combined size of all frames
print("_root", "bmax");When a button with the following code is clicked, Flash prints all frames in the button's timeline, cropped to the bounding box of the frame with the label #b and sized to fill the page:
on (release) {
print(this, "bmovie");
}getURL( ), printAsBitmap( ), printAsBitmapNum( ), printNum( )
| printAsBitmap( ) Global Function | print the frames of a movie or movie clip as bitmaps |
Flash 5
printAsBitmap(target, boundingBox)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie clip or document level to print (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
A string indicating how the printed frames of target should be cropped when printed, as described earlier under print( ).
The printAsBitmap( ) function is functionally identical to print( ), except that it outputs rasterized content to the printer, not vectors. It can, therefore, successfully print movies with color transformations but produces poorer quality for vector-based artwork.
See Usage notes under the print( ) function.
print( ), printAsBitmapNum( ), printNum( )
| printAsBitmapNum( ) Global Function | print the frames of a document level as bitmaps |
Flash 5
printAsBitmapNum(level, boundingBox)
A non-negative integer or an expression that yields a non-negative integer, indicating the document level to print.
A string indicating how the printed frames of target should be cropped when printed, as described earlier under print( ).
The printAsBitmapNum( ) function is nearly identical to printAsBitmap( ) except that it requires the target level of the print operation to be specified as a number rather than as a string. This means that printAsBitmapNum( ) can print only document levels, not movie clips. It is normally used when we wish to dynamically assign the level of a movie to print, as in:
var x = 3; printAsBitmapNum(x, "bmax");
which could also be achieved using string concatenation with the regular printAsBitmap( ) function:
printAsBitmap("_level" + x, "bmax");See Usage notes under the print( ) function.
print( ), printAsBitmap( ), printNum( )
| printNum( ) Global Function | print the frames of a document level using vectors |
Flash 5
printNum(level, boundingBox)
A non-negative integer or an expression that yields a non-negative integer indicating the document level to print.
A string indicating how the printed frames of target should be cropped when printed, as described earlier under print( ).
The printNum( ) function is nearly identical to print( ) except that it requires the target level of the print operation to be specified as a number rather than as a string. This means that printNum( ) can print only document levels, not movie clips. It is normally used when we wish to dynamically assign the level of a movie to print, as in:
var x = 3; printNum(x, "bmax");
which could also be achieved using string concatenation with the regular print( ) function:
print("_level" + x, "bmax");See Usage notes under the print( ) function.
print( ), printAsBitmap( ), printAsBitmapNum( )
| _quality Global Property | the rendering quality of the Player |
Flash 5
_quality
Read/write
The _quality property stores a string that dictates the rendering quality of the Flash Player as follows:
Low quality. Neither bitmaps nor vectors are antialiased (smoothed).
Medium quality. Vectors are moderately antialiased.
High quality. Vectors are highly antialiased. Bitmaps are antialiased when no animation is occurring.
Best quality. Both bitmaps and vectors are always antialiased.
Lower rendering quality means that fewer calculations are required to draw a frame of the movie, resulting in faster performance. The typical setting of _quality for most movies is "HIGH".
Here we set the rendering quality of a movie to the best it can be (which also causes the slowest playback):
_quality = "BEST";
_highQuality, toggleHighQuality( )
| random( ) Global Function | generate a random number |
Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of Math.random( )
random(number)
A positive integer.
A random integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than number.
The deprecated random( ) function was used in Flash 4 to generate random numbers. This function has been retired from the language and is available only for the sake of backward compatibility. In Flash 5 and higher, use the preferred Math.random( ) method. Note that random( ) generated integers from to number -1, whereas Math.random( ) generates floats from 0.0 to .999.
Math.random( )
| removeMovieClip( ) Global Function | delete a movie clip from the Flash Player |
Flash 4; enhanced in Flash 5 to apply to instances created with attachMovie( )
removeMovieClip(target)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie clip instance to be removed from the Player (references to movie clips are converted to paths when used in a string context).
The removeMovieClip( ) function deletes the specified movie clip from the Player, leaving no trace of the clip's contents or shell. Subsequent references to the clip or any of its variables or properties yield undefined.
The removeMovieClip( ) function may be used only on movie clip instances that were originally created via duplicateMovieClip( ) or attachMovie( ). It has no effect on movie clips created in the authoring tool.
attachMovie( ), duplicateMovieClip( ), MovieClip( ).removeMovieClip( ); Section 13.6, "Removing Clip Instances and Main Movies" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| _root Global Property | a reference to the main timeline of the movie in the current level |
Flash 5 (same as "/" in Flash 4 movies)
_root
Read-only
The _root property stores a reference to the main timeline of the current document level. We use _root to invoke methods on the main movie or to retrieve and set the main movie's properties. For example:
_root.play( ); // Play the main timeline _root._alpha = 40; // Make the whole movie partially transparent
The _root property may also be used to refer to nested clips. For example:
_root.myClip.play( ); _root.shapes.square._visible = false;
The _root property provides access to a movie clip in absolute terms. That is, a reference that starts with _root is valid (and invariant) from anywhere in a movie.
_leveln; _ parent; Section 13.5.4, "Referring to Main Movies with _root and _leveln" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips" and Section 2.5.6, "Accessing Variables on Different Timelines" in Chapter 2, "Variables"
| scroll Property | the current top line displayed in a text field |
Flash 4 and later
textfield.scroll
A positive integer representing the number of the topmost viewable line of a text field.
The scroll text field property can be both retrieved and set. When we retrieve the value of a text field's scroll property, it indicates the number of the line currently displayed as the first line in the field's viewable region. When we set the value of scroll, it scrolls the text field, making the supplied line number the top line in the field's viewable region. The scroll property is normally used with maxscroll to create text-scrolling interfaces as described under Section 18.4.3, "Typical Text-Scrolling Code" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields".
Though scroll is listed as a function in Flash, it is effectively used as a property of a text field variable. Notice that parentheses are not used when scroll is invoked.
In Build 5.0 r30 of the Flash Player, when a text field's font is embedded, using scroll may cause some text to be displayed outside the visual region of the field. Some text may not be removed as the text in the field scrolls. To work around the problem, use a mask over the text field layer. This problem was fixed in Build 5.0 r41.
// Sets x to the index of the top line displayed in myField var x = myField.scroll; // Scrolls the text in myField down one myField.scroll++;
maxscroll; Section 18.4.1, "The scroll Property" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields"
| Selection Object | control over text field selections |
Flash 5
Selection.methodName()
Retrieve the index of the insertion point.
Retrieve the index of the last selected character.
Identify the text field in which the insertion point currently resides.
Place the insertion point in a specific text field.
Select characters in the currently focused text field.
We use the Selection object to control user interaction with text fields and to capture portions of text fields. In actual use, the Selection object methods are preceded by the keyword Selection; they always operate on the text field with focus, of which there can be only one at any given time. The methods of a Selection object can position the insertion point and can select or retrieve a text field's content. These abilities add subtle but important behavior to user-input systems. For example, in a user-login screen, we can prompt a user to enter his name by placing the cursor in a name-entry text field. Or we can highlight an error in a form by selecting the problematic text. We can also customize the so-called Tab order of a series of text fields, as shown under Reference 20.205.
Positions of the characters in a text field are referred to with zero-relative indexes where the first character is index 0, the second is index 1, and so on. Character indexing is described in detail in Section 4.6.4, "Character Indexing" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes".
In Flash 5 it is not possible to cut, copy, or paste text programmatically. Further, cut, copy, and paste shortcut keys such as Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V are not functional in the Flash Player. The secondary mouse button (right-click on Windows, Ctrl-click on Macintosh) provides access to the cut, copy, and paste commands.
Clicking a form's submit button automatically removes focus from any previously focused text field. To capture a selection before focus is lost, use the button's rollover event. For example:
on (rollOver) {
focusedField = Selection.getFocus();
}_focusrect, Selection.setFocus( ); Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields"
| Selection.getBeginIndex( ) Method | retrieve the index of a text field's first selected character |
Flash 5
Selection.getBeginIndex()
The index of the first character in the current selection (highlighted block of text). If no text field has keyboard focus, it returns -1. If a text field has focus but no characters are selected, it returns the value of Selection.getCaretIndex( ).
The getBeginIndex( ) method identifies the beginning of a selection. To determine the span of characters currently selected, use both getBeginIndex( ) and getEndIndex( ).
The following example creates a string representing the currently selected characters and then displays that string in the Output window:
var firstChar = Selection.getBeginIndex( ); var lastChar = Selection.getEndIndex( ); var currentSelection = eval(Selection.getFocus( )).substring(firstChar, lastChar); trace(currentSelection);
The following code extends the current selection by one character to the left:
Selection.setSelection(Selection.getBeginIndex() - 1, Selection.getEndIndex( ));
Selection.getCaretIndex( ), Selection.getEndIndex( )
| Selection.getCaretIndex( ) Method | retrieve the index of the insertion point |
Flash 5
Selection.getCaretIndex()
The index of the insertion point in the current text field. If no text field has keyboard focus, it returns -1. If the text field with focus is empty, it returns 0.
The getCaretIndex( ) method indicates the insertion point (i.e., the location of the cursor) in a text field. The cursor appears as an I-beam when a text field has keyboard focus. Use setSelection( ) to set the location of the insertion point.
Because getCaretIndex( ) returns -1 when no text field has focus, we may determine whether any field has focus by checking whether getCaretIndex( ) is equal to -1, as follows:
if (Selection.getCaretIndex( ) == -1) {
trace("No field has focus");
}Selection.setSelection( )
| Selection.getEndIndex( ) Method | retrieve the index of the last selected character |
Flash 5
Selection.getEndIndex()
The index of the character after the last character in the current selection (highlighted block of text). If no text field has focus, it returns -1. If a text field has focus but no characters are selected, it returns the value of Selection.getCaretIndex( ).
The getEndIndex( ) method identifies the end of a selection. To identify the span of characters currently selected, use both getEndIndex( ) and getBeginIndex( ).
The following code extends the current selection by one character to the right:
Selection.setSelection(Selection.getBeginIndex(), Selection.getEndIndex( )+ 1);
| Selection.getFocus( ) Method | identify the text field in which the cursor currently resides |
Flash 5
Selection.getFocus()
A string indicating the full path to the text field variable that has keyboard focus (i.e., the one in which the cursor currently resides), for example, "_level1.myTextField". If no text field has keyboard focus, it returns null.
The getFocus( ) method identifies which text field currently has focus (if any) by returning its string path. To turn that string into a variable reference, we use eval( ). For example, in the following code we identify the number of characters in the text field with focus. We retrieve the name of the field by invoking getFocus( ), and we convert that name into a variable with eval( ) :
var numChars = eval(Selection.getFocus( )).length;
Because getFocus( ) returns null when no text field is selected, we may determine whether any field has focus by checking whether getFocus( ) is equal to null, as follows:
if (Selection.getFocus( ) == null) {
trace("No field has focus");
}Selection.setFocus( ), eval( ), Selection.getCaretIndex( )
| Selection.setFocus( ) Method | set keyboard focus for a specific text field |
Flash 5
Selection.setFocus(variableName)
A string representing the path (e.g., "_root.myTextField" or "userName") to the text field variable that is to receive focus.
A Boolean indicating whether the focus attempt succeeded (true) or failed (false). A focus attempt fails only if the variable specified by variableName is not found or if it is not a text field variable.
The setFocus( ) method sets the keyboard focus for a text field. It places the cursor in that text field, normally in order to draw attention to the field or to allow the user to enter data. The setFocus( ) method can also provide a handy means of identifying erroneous input to a user. In an online form, for example, a user may mistype an email address. To alert the user to the error, we could set the focus to the email-address text field and ask her to fix the problem. We can also use setFocus( ) to create a custom Tab key order for the fields in a form, as shown in the example that follows.
Note that setting the focus of a text field automatically selects any content in that field. To set a field's focus without selecting any characters, use the following code:
// First, focus myField
Selection.setFocus("myField");
// Now place the insertion point at the start of myField
Selection.setSelection(0, 0);
// Or at the end of myField
Selection.setSelection(myField.length, myField.length);TIP
When a movie is viewed in a browser, a focused text field will accept text entry only if the Flash movie itself has focus (that is, the user has clicked on the movie at some point during movie playback). Make sure a movie has focus before asking a user to type into one of its text fields. One way to do this is by including a button that says "Click Here to Start" at the beginning of your movie.
This example shows how to assign a custom Tab order to the fields in a fill-in form. The corresponding sample .fla file may be downloaded from the online Code Depot (for more information on trapping the Tab key, see Section 10.11.4.1, "Handling special keys" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"):
// Custom Tab Order
// CODE ON THE MOVIE CLIP CONTAINING THE FORM FIELDS
onClipEvent (load) {
// Store the path to this clip in a string. We'll use it
// later when invoking Selection.setFocus( ).
path = targetPath(this);
// Create an array with the names of our text fields, supplied
// in the desired Tab order. The first field listed is the default.
tabOrder = ["field1", "field3", "field2", "field4"];
}
onClipEvent (keyUp) {
// If the Tab key was pressed...
if (Key.getCode( ) == Key.TAB) {
// ...If no field has focus...
if (Selection.getFocus( ) == null) {
// ...then set focus to the first field in the array of fields
Selection.setFocus(path + "." + tabOrder[0]);
} else {
// Otherwise, locate the currently focused field in the array of fields
i = 0;
focused = Selection.getFocus( );
while (i < tabOrder.length) {
// Extract the name of the field variable from the full path
// that's returned by Selection.getFocus( )
fieldName = focused.substring(focused.lastIndexOf(".") + 1);
// Check each element of tabOrder for the focused field.
if (tabOrder[i] == fieldName) {
// Stop when we find a match
currentFocus = i;
break;
}
i++;
}
// Now that we know where the focused field lies in the tabOrder array,
// set the new focus to either the next field or the previous field,
// depending on whether the Shift key is down.
if (Key.isDown(Key.SHIFT)) {
// Shift key is down, so go to the previous field, unless we're already
// at the beginning, in which case go to the last field.
nextFocus = currentFocus-1 == -1 ? tabOrder.length-1 : currentFocus-1;
} else {
// Shift key is not down, so go to the next field,
// unless we're already at the end, in which case go to the first field.
nextFocus = currentFocus+1 == tabOrder.length ? 0 : currentFocus+1;
}
// Finally, assign the new focus
Selection.setFocus(path + "." + tabOrder[nextFocus]);
}
}
}
// CODE ON BUTTON ON MAIN TIMELINE
on (keyPress "<Tab>") {
// This placeholder code just traps the Tab key in Internet Explorer
var tabCatcher = 0;
}| Selection.setSelection( ) Method | select characters in the text field with focus, or set the insertion point |
Flash 5
Selection.setSelection(beginIndex, endIndex)
A non-negative integer specifying the index of the first character to be included in the new selection.
A non-negative integer specifying the index of the character after the last character to be included in the new selection.
The setSelection( ) method selects (highlights) the characters from beginIndex to endIndex-1 in the text field with focus. If no field has focus, setSelection( ) has no effect. It is commonly used to highlight problematic user input.
Though the Selection object does not have a "setCaretIndex" method, we may use the setSelection( ) method to set the insertion point to a specific location within a text field. To do so, we specify the same beginIndex and endIndex values, as in:
// Set the insertion point after the third character Selection.setSelection(3, 3);
// Select the second and third letters // of the currently focused text field Selection.setSelection(1, 3);
Selection.getBeginIndex( ), Selection.getCaretIndex( ), Selection.getEndIndex( )
| setProperty( ) Global Function | assign a value to a movie clip property |
Flash 4 and later
setProperty(movieClip, property, value)
An expression that yields a string indicating the path to a movie clip. In Flash 5, this may also be a movie clip reference because movie clip references are converted to paths when used in a string context.
The name of the built-in property to which value will be assigned. Must be an identifier, not a string (e.g., _alpha, not "_alpha").
The new data value to be assigned to the specified property of movieClip.
The setProperty( ) function assigns value to one of movieClip's built-in properties (the built-in properties are listed under the MovieClip class ). It cannot be used to set the value of custom (i.e., user-defined) properties. In Flash 4, setProperty( ) was the only means to assign movie clip property values; as of Flash 5, the . and [] operators are the preferred means of setting both built-in and custom movie clip properties.
// Flash 4 syntax. Rotate the main movie by 45 degrees:
setProperty("_root", _rotation, 45);
// Flash 5 syntax. Also rotates the main movie by 45 degrees:
_root._rotation = 45;getProperty( ); Section 13.1, "The "Objectness" of Movie Clips" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"; Appendix C, "Backward Compatibility".
| Sound Class | control over sounds in a movie |
Flash 5
new Sound() new Sound(target)
A string indicating the path to the movie clip or document level whose sound is to be controlled. May also be a reference to a movie clip or document level (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
Associate a sound from the Library with the Sound object.
Retrieve the current pan setting.
Determine the current distribution of the channels of a sound to the left and right speakers (i.e., balance).
Retrieve the current volume.
Set the pan across a sound's left and right channels.
Distribute the left and right channels between the left and right speakers (i.e., balance).
Set the sound volume.
Start playing an attached sound.
Silence all sounds or a specified attached sound.
Objects of the Sound class are used to control the existing sounds in a movie or to control sounds added to a movie programmatically. Sound objects have several distinct applications. They can control:
All the sounds in the Flash Player
All the sounds in a particular movie clip instance or main movie (including all sounds in any nested clips)
An individual programmatically attached sound
To create a Sound object that controls all the sounds in the Player (including sounds in .swf files on document levels), use the Sound constructor without any parameters. For example:
myGlobalSound = new Sound( );
To create a Sound object that controls all the sounds in a particular clip or main movie, supply a target parameter indicating the clip or movie to control. Note that this also controls sounds in clips inside target. For example:
spaceshipSound = new Sound("spaceship"); // Control sounds in spaceship clip
mainSound = new Sound("_root"); // Control sounds on main timelineTo make an individual sound that can be started, stopped, and looped independently, create any kind of Sound object and then attach a sound to it using the attachSound( ) method.
stopAllSounds( ); _soundbuftime
| Sound.attachSound( ) Method | associate a sound from the Library with a Sound object |
Flash 5
soundObject.attachSound(linkageIdentifier)
The name of the sound to attach, as specified in the Library under
Options Linkage.
The attachSound( ) method adds a new sound to a movie at runtime and places the new sound under soundObject's control. Once attached, the sound may be started and stopped individually by invoking start( ) and stop( ) on soundObject.
In order for a sound to be attached to soundObject, the sound must be exported from the movie's Library. To export a sound, follow these steps:
In the Library, select the sound to export.
Select Options Linkage. The Symbol Linkage Properties dialog
box appears.
Select Export This Symbol.
In the Identifier box, type a unique name by which to identify the sound.
Note that all exported sounds are loaded in the first frame of the movie that contains them (not when they are actually attached or played via ActionScript), which can cause long load delays if the sounds are large. You can gain better control over the loading of sounds by placing them in external .swf files and using loadMovie( ) to import them as necessary.
Only one sound may be attached to a Sound object at a time. Attaching a new sound to a Sound object replaces any sound previously attached to that object. Note that attachSound( ) will not work in movies loaded into a clip or a level via loadMovie( ) unless the attached sound is available in the Library of the document to which the Sound object is scoped. Global sound objects created without a target parameter are scoped to _level0.
The following example adds a sound with the identifier phaser to the Sound object phaserSound . It then starts and stops the phaser sound:
phaserSound = new Sound( );
phaserSound.attachSound("phaser");
// Start the phaser sound
phaserSound.start( );
// Stop just the phaser sound
phaserSound.stop("phaser");Sound.start( ), Sound.stop( )
| Sound.getPan( ) Method | retrieve the last pan value set |
Flash 5
soundObject.getPan()
A number indicating the last value set by setPan( ). Usually in the range -100 (left channel on, right channel off) to 100 (right channel on, left channel off). Default value is (both left and right channels in equal proportions).
By adjusting the pan of a sound, you can create the illusion of a moving sound source. The getPan( ) method is used to determine the current distribution of the left and right channels of the sounds controlled by soundObject. Normally, getPan( ) is used in combination with setPan( ) to adjust the current pan of a sound.
Here we alter the pan of a sound by 20:
mySound = new Sound( ); mySound.setPan(mySound.getPan( ) - 20);
Sound.getTransform( ), Sound.setPan( )
| Sound.getTransform( ) Method | determine the current distribution of the channels of a sound to the left and right speakers |
Flash 5
soundObject.getTransform()
An anonymous object whose properties contain the channel percentage values for the sounds controlled by soundObject.
The getTransform( ) method returns an object with properties that tell us how the channels in the sounds controlled by soundObject are distributed to the left and right speakers. The properties of the returned object are ll, lr, rl, and rr, as described in the entry for the Sound.setTransform( ) method.
Sound.getPan( ), Sound.setTransform( )
| Sound.getVolume( ) Method | retrieve the current volume setting |
Flash 5
soundObject.getVolume()
A number indicating the current volume as set by setVolume( ). Usually in the range (no volume) to 100 (default volume), but it can be higher.
The getVolume( ) method is used to determine the current volume of the sounds controlled by soundObject. Normally, getVolume( ) is used in combination with setVolume( ) to adjust the current volume of a sound.
Here we reduce the volume of a sound by 20:
mySound = new Sound( ); mySound.setVolume(mySound.getVolume( ) - 20);
Sound.setVolume( )
| Sound.setPan( ) Method | set the balance of a sound's left and right channels |
Flash 5
soundObject.setPan(pan)
A number between -100 (left) and 100 (right) indicating the distribution between the left and right speakers for sounds controlled by soundObject. If the pan supplied is greater than 100, the actual value assigned is 200 - pan. If the pan supplied is less than -100, the actual value assigned is -200 - pan.
The setPan( ) method dictates the balance of the right and left channels of the sounds controlled by soundObject. By adjusting the pan over time, we can cause a sound to move from one speaker to the other (known as panning).
To play the sounds controlled by soundObject in the left speaker only, use a pan of -100. To play the sounds controlled by soundObject in the right speaker only, use a pan of 100. To balance the two channels evenly, use a pan of 0.
Note that setPan( ) affects all the sounds controlled by soundObject. If soundObject is a global sound, setPan( ) affects all the sounds in a movie. If soundObject is tied to a clip or a main timeline, setPan( ) affects all the sounds in that clip or timeline and all the clips it contains.
The effects of setPan( ) can be changed only by another call to setPan( ). A setPan( ) assignment affects all future sounds controlled by soundObject, even if soundObject is deleted.
The following clip event handlers cause sounds in a movie clip to endlessly pan between the left and right speakers:
onClipEvent (load) {
panEffect = new Sound(this);
panDirection = "right";
panIncrement = 50;
}
onClipEvent(enterFrame) {
if (panDirection == "right") {
newPan = panEffect.getPan( ) + panIncrement;
if (newPan > 100) {
panDirection = "left";
panEffect.setPan(panEffect.getPan( ) - panIncrement);
} else {
panEffect.setPan(newPan);
}
} else {
newPan = panEffect.getPan( ) - panIncrement;
if (newPan < -100) {
panDirection = "right";
panEffect.setPan(panEffect.getPan( ) + panIncrement);
} else {
panEffect.setPan(newPan);
}
}
}The following clip event handlers cause sounds in a clip to react to the mouse. Assuming a Stage width and height of 550 and 400, the sounds pan left and right with the mouse's horizontal movement and increase or decrease in volume with the mouse's vertical movement:
onClipEvent (load) {
// Create a new Sound object and attach the sound bgMusic to it
mySound = new Sound(this);
mySound.attachSound("bgMusic");
mySound.start(0, 999); // Play and loop the sound
}
onClipEvent (enterFrame) {
// Measure the mouse's horizontal location, then set the pan accordingly
mouseX = (_root._xmouse / 550) * 200;
mySound.setPan(mouseX - 100);
// Measure the mouse's vertical location, then set the volume accordingly
mouseY = (_root._ymouse / 400) * 300;
mySound.setVolume(300 - mouseY);
}| Sound.setTransform( ) Method | distribute the left and right channels between the left and right speakers |
Flash 5
soundObject.setTransform(transformObject)
A user-defined object that specifies new channel settings as a series of properties.
The setTransform( ) method gives us precise control over how the channels in a sound are output to the left and right speakers. In principle, setTransform( ) is not unlike setPan( ), but it provides more detailed sound control over stereo sounds.
A stereo sound is a combination of two distinct sounds -- the left channel and the right channel -- which are normally sent separately to the left and right speakers. However, using setTransform( ), we may dictate how much of each channel is broadcast in each speaker. We may, for example, say, "Play half of the left channel in the left speaker, none of the left channel in the right speaker, and all of the right channel in both speakers." Or we may say, "Play all of the left and right channels in the left speaker."
To use setTransform( ), we must first create an object with a series of predefined properties. The properties express how to distribute the left and right channels of a stereo sound between the left and right speakers, as described in Table 20-12.
|
Property Value |
Property Description |
|
|---|---|---|
|
0 to 100 |
The percentage of the left channel to play in the left speaker |
|
|
0 to 100 |
The percentage of the right channel to play in the left speaker |
|
|
0 to 100 |
The percentage of the left channel to play in the right speaker |
|
|
0 to 100 |
The percentage of the right channel to play in the right speaker |
Once we have created an object with the properties described in Table 20-12, we pass that object to the setTransform( ) method of our Sound object. The values of the properties on our transformObject become the new channel output percentages for the sounds controlled by soundObject.
To examine the current percentages of a particular Sound object, we use the Sound.getTransform( ) method.
// Create a new Sound object mySound = new Sound( ); // Create a new generic object to use with setTransform( ) transformer = new Object( ); // Set the properties of the transform object transformer.ll = 0; // None of left channel in left speaker transformer.lr = 0; // None of right channel in left speaker transformer.rl = 0; // None of left channel in right speaker transformer.rr = 100; // All of right channel in right speaker // Apply the new channel distribution by passing the transform // object to the setTransform( ) method mySound.setTransform(transformer);
Sound.getTransform( ), Sound.setPan( )
| Sound.setVolume( ) Method | set the volume of sounds controlled by a Sound object |
Flash 5
soundObject.setVolume(volume)
A number indicating the loudness of the sound controlled by soundObject, where is no volume (mute). The larger volume's absolute value (regardless of whether volume is positive or negative), the louder the sounds controlled by soundObject will be. For example, -50 is the same volume as 50. The default value for volume is 100.
The setVolume( ) method makes the sounds controlled by soundObject louder or softer. To entirely mute a sound, use a volume of 0. To make a sound louder, increase volume. Values in the range 100-200 are generally quite loud, but there is no predefined maximum.
Note that setVolume( ) affects all the sounds controlled by soundObject. If soundObject is a global sound, setVolume( ) affects all the sounds in a movie. If soundObject is tied to a clip or a main timeline, setVolume( ) affects all the sounds in that clip or timeline.
The effects of setVolume( ) remain in effect until overridden by another setVolume( ) call. A setVolume( ) assignment affects all future sounds controlled by soundObject, even if soundObject is deleted.
The first example simply sets the volume of a movie clip:
var mySound = new Sound( ); mySound.setVolume (65);
The following example shows how to make buttons that adjust a movie's volume level:
// CODE ON THE MAIN MOVIE TIMELINE
var globalSound = new Sound( );
var maxVolume = 200;
var minVolume = 0;
var volumeIncrement = 20;
// CODE ON VOLUME-UP BUTTON ON MAIN TIMELINE
on (release) {
globalSound.setVolume(Math.min(globalSound.getVolume( ) + volumeIncrement,
maxVolume));
}
// CODE ON VOLUME-DOWN BUTTON ON MAIN TIMELINE
on (release) {
globalSound.setVolume(Math.max(globalSound.getVolume( ) - volumeIncrement,
minVolume));
}Sound.getVolume( )
| Sound.start( ) Method | begin playing an attached sound |
Flash 5
soundObject.start(secondOffset, loops)
A floating-point number indicating the time in seconds at which to start playing the sound attached to soundObject (often called an entry point). For example, a secondOffset of 1 starts playback one second after the sound's actual beginning as defined in the Library. The default is 0. There is no provision for an exit point (the time at which to stop playing the sound). The sound plays until its end unless stopped manually.
A positive integer indicating how many times to play the sound attached to soundObject. To play the sound once, use 1 (which is the default); to play the sound twice in succession, use 2, and so on. The portion of the sound from secondOffset is repeated to its end the number of times specified by loops.
The start( ) method is used to play programmatically-defined sounds that were added to soundObject via attachSound( ). The start( ) method does not play all the sounds in a clip or movie; it plays only the sound most recently attached to soundObject via attachSound( ).
To play only a portion of the sound attached to soundObject, use the secondOffset argument. To play the sound attached to soundObject repeatedly, use the loops argument.
// Create a new Sound object
boink = new Sound( );
// Attach a sound exported as boink to the Sound object
boink.attachSound("boink");
// Play all of boink; soundOffset defaults to 0
boink.start( );
// Play only a portion of boink, starting 0.5 seconds into it; loops defaults to 1
boink.start(.5);
// Play boink three times from beginning to end
boink.start(0, 3);Sound.stop( )
| Sound.stop( ) Method | silences all sounds or a specified attached sound |
Flash 5
soundObject.stop() soundObject.stop(linkageIdentifier)
The name
of any sound attached to any Sound object with
the same target as
soundObject. Linkage identifiers are
specified in the Library under Options Linkage.
When invoked without a linkageIdentifier, stop( ) silences all sounds controlled by soundObject; if soundObject is a global sound, stop( ) silences all sounds in a movie; if soundObject was created with a target parameter, stop( ) silences all sounds in target.
When invoked with a linkageIdentifier, stop( ) silences only the specific sound named by linkageIdentifier. In that case, linkageIdentifier must be a sound that was attached to a Sound object via attachSound( ). However, the sound to stop need not be attached to soundObject itself. It may be attached to any Sound object that shares the same target as soundObject. Or, if soundObject was created with no target (i.e., is a global Sound object), the sound to stop may be attached to any other global Sound object.
// Create a global Sound object
mySound = new Sound( );
// Attach the sound doorbell to the object
mySound.attachSound("doorbell");
// Stop all sounds in the movie
mySound.stop( );
// Play doorbell
mySound.start( );
// Stop just doorbell
mySound.stop("doorbell");
// Create another global Sound object
myOtherSound = new Sound( );
// Attach a doorknock sound to the object
myOtherSound.attachSound("doorknock");
// Play doorknock
myOtherSound.start( );
// Now stop the doorknock through mySound, not myOtherSound.
// This works because the two Sound objects have the same target.
mySound.stop("doorknock");Sound.start( )
| _soundbuftime Global Property | length of a streaming sound, in seconds, to preload |
Flash 4 and later
_soundbuftime
Read/write
The _soundbuftime property is an integer specifying the number of seconds of a streamed sound to preload before playing it. The default is 5 seconds.
Flash synchronizes movie playback with streaming sounds to ensure that, say, a cartoon character's lips match an accompanying sound track. Animations will pause until _soundbuftime seconds of streaming sound are downloaded; therefore, a long setting can cause excessive startup times on slower connections. Because network streaming may be slow or briefly interrupted, a short _soundbuftime setting can cause sound to skip (i.e., if enough sound data wasn't buffered). The ideal setting will vary from movie to movie based on the complexity of the graphics, the quality settings of the sound, and the bandwidth of the end user's Internet connection. The default setting (5 seconds) usually works well, but experimentation may be required to find the best setting for individual cases. The streaming buffer time can be changed during playback, but it is a global property and cannot be set separately for individual sounds.
_soundbuftime = 10; // Buffer 10 seconds of audio
| startDrag( ) Global Function | make a movie or movie clip follow the mouse pointer |
Flash 4 and later
startDrag(target) startDrag(target, lockCenter) startDrag(target, lockCenter, left, top, right, bottom)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie or movie clip instance that should follow the mouse pointer (references to movie clips are converted to paths when used in a string context).
A Boolean indicating whether the target's registration point should be centered under the mouse pointer (true) or dragged relative to its original location (false).
A number specifying the minimum x-coordinate to the left of which target's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the minimum y-coordinate above which target's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the maximum x-coordinate to the right of which target's registration point may not be dragged.
A number specifying the maximum y-coordinate below which target's registration point may not be dragged.
The startDrag( ) function causes target to visually follow the mouse pointer around in the Player (known as dragging the clip). The movement of a dragging clip can be constrained to a bounding box whose coordinates are provided as arguments to the startDrag( ) function. Bounding box coordinates are given relative to the canvas on which target resides. If that canvas is the main movie Stage, then (0, 0) is the top-left corner of the Stage. If that canvas is a movie clip, then (0, 0) is the registration point of the clip's canvas. Note that Flash's coordinate system reverses the Cartesian Y-axis; y values increase toward the bottom of the screen and decrease toward the top of the screen. Negative y values are above the origin (i.e., above the X-axis).
Dragging can be stopped at any time via the stopDrag( ) function. Only one movie clip or movie may be dragged at a time, so issuing a startDrag( ) function on a new target automatically cancels any drag operation already in progress. That said, when a movie or move clip is dragged, all the movie clips it contains are dragged along with it.
// Drag ball, limiting its movement to the upper-left corner of the Stage
startDrag("ball", true, 0, 0, 225, 200);Movieclip.startDrag( ), stopDrag( )
| stop( ) Global Function | pause the movie's playback at the current frame |
Flash 2 and later
stop()
The stop( ) function is a simple but fundamental function that halts the playback of a movie or movie clip. It is the global counterpart of the MovieClip.stop( ) method. It is commonly used to wait for the user to, say, choose from a graphical menu.
MovieClip.stop( ), play( )
| stopAllSounds( ) Global Function | silence a movie |
Flash 3 and later
stopAllSounds()
The stopAllSounds( ) function mutes all the sounds currently playing in a movie, no matter how deeply nested in movie clips. This applies to every sound in a movie, including programmatically generated Sound objects. For more precise control over stopping, starting, and setting the volume of sounds, see the Sound class.
Note that stopAllSounds( ) has only a temporary effect. Any sound that starts after a stopAllSounds( ) invocation will play normally. There is no way to permanently mute a movie.
Sound.setVolume( ), Sound.stop( )
| stopDrag( ) Global Function | end a drag operation in progress |
Flash 4 and later
stopDrag()
The startDrag( ) function causes a movie clip to follow the mouse pointer around the Stage. A stopDrag( ) operation stops a dragging movie clip from following the mouse pointer. Because only one movie clip or movie may be dragged at a time, stopDrag( ) does not require a target argument; it simply cancels any drag operation in progress.
Together with startDrag( ), stopDrag( ) is used to create simple drag-and-drop interfaces in Flash, as demonstrated under "Interface Widgets" in the online Code Depot.
The following button code causes a movie clip to be dragged while the button is pressed and dropped when the button is released:
on (press) {
startDrag("", true);
}
on (release) {
stopDrag( );
}MovieClip.stopDrag( ), startDrag( ), String.toLowerCase( ) ; Section 4.6.8.1, "The toUpperCase( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String( ) Global Function | convert a value to the String datatype |
Flash 5
String(value)
An expression containing the value to be converted to a string.
The result of converting value to a primitive string.
The String( ) function converts its argument to a primitive string value and returns that converted value. The results of converting various types of data to a primitive string are described in Table 3-2. It's normally not necessary to use the String( ) function; ActionScript automatically converts values to the string type when appropriate.
Be sure not to confuse the global String( ) function with the String class constructor. The former converts an expression to a string, whereas the later is a class that wraps primitive string data in an object so that properties and methods may be applied to it.
Note that the String( ) function sometimes appears in Flash 4 .fla files that have been converted to the Flash 5 format. For information on how datatypes are handled when Flash 4 files are converted to Flash 5, see Section 3.4.4, "Flash 4-to-Flash 5 Datatype Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes".
The String class; Section 3.4.2, "Explicit Type Conversion" in Chapter 3, "Data and Datatypes"
| String Class | wrapper class for string primitive type |
Flash 5
new String(value)
An expression to be resolved and, if necessary, converted to a string, then wrapped in a String object.
The number of characters in a string.
The following method is invoked through the String class itself, not through an object of the String class:
Generate a string from one or more Latin 1/Shift-JIS code points.
The following object methods are invoked through an instance of the String class:
Retrieve a character at a specific position in the string.
Retrieve the code point of a character at a specific position in the string.
Combine one or more items into a single string.
Find the first occurrence of a specified substring in a string.
Find the last occurrence of a specified substring in a string.
Extract a substring from a string based on positive or negative character positions.
Convert a string to an array.
Extract a substring from a string based on a starting position and length.
Extract a substring from a string based on positive character positions only.
Return a lowercase version of a string.
Return an uppercase version of a string.
The String class has several purposes:
It allows us to access the length property of strings and perform string-related operations, such as indexOf( ) and slice( ). String objects are created (and eventually deleted) automatically by the interpreter whenever a method is invoked on a primitive string value.
It can be used to convert a datum of any type to a string.
It is used to access the fromCharCode( ) class method to create a new string based on specified Latin 1 or Shift-JIS code points.
It can be used to create a String object, which contains a primitive string value in an unnamed, internal property; however, there is little reason to do so.
In practice, the String class constructor is used primarily to convert other datatypes to strings. See the global String( ) function for more details.
Section 4.5, "The String Type" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.charAt( ) Method | retrieve the character from a specific position in a string |
Flash 5
string.charAt(index)
The integer position of the character to retrieve, which should be in the range 0 (the first character) to string.length-1 (the last character).
The character in the position index within string.
The charAt( ) method determines the character that resides at a certain position (index) in a string.
trace("It is 10:34 pm".charAt(1)); // Displays: "t" (the second letter)
var country = "Canada";
trace(country.charAt(0)); // Displays: "C" (the first letter)
// This function removes all the spaces from a string and returns the result
function stripSpaces (inString) {
var outString = "";
for (i = 0; i < inString.length; i++) {
if (inString.charAt(i) != " ") {
outString += inString.charAt(i);
}
}
return outString;
}String.charCodeAt( ), String.indexOf( ), String.slice( ); Section 4.6.5.2, "The charAt( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.charCodeAt( ) Method | retrieve the code point of the character at a specific position in a string |
Flash 5
string.charCodeAt(index)
The integer position of a character in string, which should be in the range 0 (the first character) to string.length-1 (the last character).
An integer representing the Latin 1 or Shift-JIS code point, as shown in Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes", of the character in the position index within string.
var msg = "A is the first letter of the Latin alphabet."; trace(msg.charCodeAt(0)); // Displays: 65 (the code for the "A" character) trace(msg.charCodeAt(1)); // Displays: 32 (the code for the space character)
String.charAt( ), String.fromCharCode( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes", Section 4.6.9.2, "The charCodeAt( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.concat( ) Method | combine one or more values into a single string |
Flash 5
string.concat(value1, value2,...valuen)
Values to be converted to strings (if necessary) and concatenated with string .
The result of concatenating string with value1, value2, ...valuen .
The concat( ) method creates a string from a series of values. It is equivalent to using the concatenation operator (+) with strings but is sometimes preferred for clarity, as the + operator can also be used to add numbers. For details on concat( ), see Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes".
Note that concat( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
var greeting = "Hello";
excitedGreeting = greeting.concat("!");
trace(greeting); // Displays: "Hello"
trace(excitedGreeting); // Displays: "Hello!"
var x = 4; // Initialize x as an integer
trace(x + 5); // Displays: 9
trace(x.concat(5)); // Fails because x is not a string.
trace(String(x).concat(5)); // Displays: "45"
var x = "4"; // Initialize x as a string
trace(x.concat(5)); // Displays: "45"
trace(concat("foo", "fee")); // Fails because concat( ) must be invoked
// as a method of a string.The + operator, in Chapter 5, "Operators", Section 4.6.1.1, "The concat( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.fromCharCode( ) Class Method | generate a string from one or more code points |
Flash 5
String.fromCharCode(code_ point1, code_ point2,...code_ pointn)
A series of one or more decimal integers corresponding to Latin 1 or Shift-JIS character code points, as shown in Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes".
A string formed by concatenating the characters represented by the specified code points.
The fromCharCode( ) class method produces a character or series of characters from character code points as described in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes".
// Makes a copyright symbol, followed by the year (2001) copyNotice = String.fromCharCode(169) + " 2001";
String.charCodeAt( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes", Section 4.6.9.1, "The fromCharCode( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.indexOf( ) Method | find the first occurrence of a substring in a string |
Flash 5
string.indexOf(substring) string.indexOf(substring, startIndex)
A string containing the character or characters to search for.
An optional integer position in string at which to start searching for substring. Should be in the range (the first character) to string.length-1 (the last character). Defaults to 0.
The position of the first occurrence of substring in string (starting at startIndex). Returns -1 if substring is not found at or after startIndex in string.
The indexOf( ) method is used to search for characters in strings or to check whether a string contains a certain substring.
// Check if an email address contains an @ sign
var email = "derekaol.com";
if (email.indexOf("@") == -1) {
trace ("This isn't a valid email address");
}
// Check if an email address has an @ sign and is from the domain aol.com
var email = "derek@aol.com";
var atPos = email.indexOf("@");
if (atPos != -1 && email.indexOf("aol.com") == atPos + 1) {
gotoAndStop("AOLuserOffer");
}The following code shows a generic function that checks for a keyword in a string, as you might need when grading a fill-in-the-blank quiz:
// Generic function to search origStr for any occurrence
// of searchStr using a case-insensitive comparison
function search (origStr, searchStr) {
var origStr = origStr.toLowerCase( );
var searchStr = searchStr.toLowerCase( );
return origStr.indexOf(searchStr) != -1;
}
var answer = "einstein";
var guess = "Dr. Albert Einstein";
// Increment score if guess contains "einstein"
if (search(guess, answer)) {
score++;
}String.charAt( ), String.lastIndexOf( ); Section 4.6.5.3, "The indexOf( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.lastIndexOf( ) Method | find the last occurrence of a substring in a string |
Flash 5
string.lastIndexOf(substring) string.lastIndexOf(substring, startIndex)
A string containing the character or characters to search for.
An optional integer position in string at which to start the search for substring. The string is searched backward from startIndex, which should be in the range 0 (the first character) to string.length-1 (the last character). Defaults to string.length-1.
The position of the last occurrence of substring in string prior to startIndex. Returns -1 if substring is not found prior to startIndex in string.
The lastIndexOf( ) method is used to search for the last occurrence of a substring in a string or to check whether a string contains a certain substring.
URL = "http://www.moock.org/webdesign/flash/fillthewindow.html";
// Finds the last slash character
lastSlash = URL.lastIndexOf("/");
// Extracts the filename from the URL
file = URL.substring(lastSlash + 1);
trace(file); // Displays: fillthewindow.htmlString.charAt( ), String.indexOf( ); Section 4.6.5.4, "The lastIndexOf( ) Function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.length Property | the number of characters in a string |
Flash 5
string.length
Read-only
The length property returns the number of characters in string. Note that a null character (ASCII 0) does not signal the end of a string, as it would in some languages, but neither is it counted in the string's length. For example:
// Create the string "A" + null + "B" var myString = String.fromCharCode(65,0,66); trace(myString.length); // Displays: 2 (The null character is ignored)
var myString = "hello";
trace (myString.length); // Displays: 5
trace ("hello".length); // Displays: 5
// Here we convert the number 1000 to a
// string in order to test its length
var age = 1000;
// Display an error message if the number has the wrong number of digits.
if (String(age).length != 2) {
trace ("Please enter a two-digit number");
}Array.length( ); Section 4.6.5.1, "The length property" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.slice( ) Method | extract a substring from a string based on positive or negative character positions |
Flash 5
string.slice(startIndex, endIndex)
The integer position of the first character to extract from string. If startIndex is negative, the position is measured from the end of the string, where -1 is the last character, -2 is the second-to-last character, and so on. (i.e., a negative startIndex specifies the character at string.length+startIndex).
The integer position of the character after the last character to extract from string. If endIndex is negative, the position is measured from the end of the string, where -1 is the last character, -2 is the second-to-last character, and so on. (i.e., a negative endIndex specifies the character at string.length+endIndex). Defaults to string.length if omitted.
A substring of string, starting at startIndex and ending at endIndex-1, where both startIndex and endIndex are zero-relative.
The slice( ) method is one of three methods that can be used to extract a substring from a string (the others being substring( ) and substr( ) ). The slice( ) method offers the option of negative start and end index values, which allows us to extract a substring by measuring back from the end of a string.
Note that slice( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
var fullName = "Steven Sid Mumby"; middleName = fullName.slice(7, 10); // Assigns "Sid" to middleName middleName = fullName.slice(-9, -6); // Also assigns "Sid" to middleName
String.substr( ), String.substring( ); Section 4.6.6.3, "The slice( ) function" and Section 4.6.7, "Combining String Examination with Substring Extraction" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.split( ) Method | convert a string into a series of array elements |
Flash 5
string.split(delimiter)
The character or series of characters at which to break string when forming elements of the new array.
An array whose elements contain the substrings formed by breaking string into segments demarcated by delimiter.
The split( ) method breaks a string into substrings, assigns those substrings to the elements of an array, and returns that array. Contiguous occurrences of delimiter without intervening characters result in empty elements. For example, the following code:
owners = "terry,doug,,,jon";
ownersArray = owners.split(",");assigns the following elements to ownersArray (elements 2 and 3 contain undefined):
0: terry 1: doug 2: 3: 4: jon
The split( ) method is typically used to convert a string received from a CGI script or text file into an array for further manipulation. It is also useful when parsing the parameters of an asfunction call from an HMTL text field <A> tag, which can pass only one string argument to a function. See Section 18.5.14, "Calling ActionScript Functions from HTML Links" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields", for example code. Common delimiters include the comma and the Tab character.
Suppose we store a list of names in a text file named names.txt. Each name is separated from the others by a Tab character, as implied by the whitespace shown:
owners=terry doug jon
On frame 1 of our movie, we load the names.txt file into our movie:
this.loadVariables("names.txt");After ensuring that names.txt has fully loaded (see Section 10.10.4, "data" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"), we split the loaded owners variable into an array:
splitString = String.fromCharCode(9); // Assign the Tab character to splitString ownersArray = owners.split(splitString); trace(ownersArray[1]); // Displays: "doug"
Note that split( ) can take a long time to execute with large bodies of text. If performance is a problem, break your data into manageable portions or consider using XML instead. See the XML class.
In Flash 5, using the empty string as a delimiter adds all of string to the first element of the array being generated. According to ECMA-262, an empty string delimiter should cause string to be broken at each character. Similarly, multicharacter delimiters are not recognized by Flash 5 and cause all of string to be assigned to the first element of the returned array.
Array.join( ); Section 4.6.6.4, "The split( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.substr( ) Method | extract a substring from a string based on a starting position and length |
Flash 5
string.substr(startIndex, length)
The integer position of the first character to extract from string. If startIndex is negative, the position is measured from the end of the string, where -1 is the last character, -2 is the second-to-last character, and so on. (i.e., a negative startIndex specifies the character at string.length+startIndex).
The number of characters to extract from string, starting at (and including) the startIndex. If not specified, all the characters from startIndex to the end of string are extracted.
A substring of string, starting at startIndex and including length characters. If length is omitted, the result contains characters from startIndex to the end of string.
The substr( ) method is one of three methods that can be used to extract a substring from a string (the others being slice( ) and substring( ) ). The substr( ) method extracts a string based on the number of characters specified by length, not based on two character indexes.
Note that substr( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
var fullName = "Steven Sid Mumby"; middleName = fullName.substr(7, 3); // Assigns "Sid" to middleName firstName = fullName.substr(0, 6); // Assigns "Steven" to firstName lastName = fullName.substr(11); // Assigns "Mumby" to lastName // Notice the negative starting indexes... middleName = fullName.substr(-9, 3); // Assigns "Sid" to middleName firstName = fullName.substr(-16, 6); // Assigns "Steven" to firstName lastName = fullName.substr(-5); // Assigns "Mumby" to lastName
String.slice( ), String.substring( ); Section 4.6.7, "Combining String Examination with Substring Extraction" and Section 4.6.6.2, "The substr( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.substring( ) Method | extract a substring from a string based on positive character positions |
string.substring(startIndex, endIndex)
The positive integer position of the first character to extract from string. If negative, 0 is used.
The positive integer position of the character after the last character to extract from string. Defaults to string.length if omitted. If negative, 0 is used.
A substring of string, starting at startIndex and ending at endIndex-1, where both startIndex and endIndex are zero-relative.
The substring( ) method is one of three methods that can be used to extract a substring from a string (the others being slice( ) and substr( ) ). The substring( ) function is identical to slice( ) except that it does not allow for negative startIndex and endIndex values, and it automatically reorders the two indexes if endIndex is less than startIndex.
Note that substring( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
// Extract names from a string
var fullName = "Steven Sid Mumby";
middleName = fullName.substring(7, 10); // Assigns "Sid" to middleName
middleName = fullName.substring(10, 7); // Assigns "Sid" to middleName
// (indexes are swapped automatically)
firstName = fullName.substring(0, 6); // Assigns "Steven" to firstName
lastName = fullName.substring(11); // Assigns "Mumby" to lastNameThe following example is a reusable function to search for and replace all occurrences of a substring within a string:
// A Search-and-Replace Function
function replace (origStr, searchStr, replaceStr) {
var tempStr = "";
var startIndex = 0;
if (searchStr == "") {
return origStr;
}
if (origStr.indexOf(searchStr) != -1) {
while ((searchIndex = origStr.indexOf(searchStr, startIndex)) != -1) {
tempStr += origStr.substring(startIndex, searchIndex);
tempStr += replaceStr;
startIndex = searchIndex + searchStr.length;
}
return tempStr + origStr.substring(startIndex);
} else {
return origStr;
}
}
msg = "three times three is four";
trace(replace(msg, "three", "two")); // Displays: "two times two is four"String.slice( ), String.substr( ); Section 4.6.7, "Combining String Examination with Substring Extraction" and Section 4.6.6.2, "The substr( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.toLowerCase( ) Method | generate a lowercase version of a string |
Flash 5
string.toLowerCase()
The lowercase equivalent of string as a new string. Characters without a lowercase equivalent are left unchanged.
The toLowerCase( ) method creates a new, lowercase version of string ; it can be used for formatting or to facilitate case-insensitive character comparisons. The toLowerCase( ) method converts only characters in the range A-Z (it does not convert characters with diacritical marks such as accents and umlauts).
Note that toLowerCase( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
// Set msg to "this sentence has mixed caps!"
msg = "ThiS SenTencE Has MixED CaPs!".toLowerCase( );
// Perform a case-insensitive comparison of two strings
function caseInsensitiveCompare (stringA, stringB) {
return (stringA.toLowerCase() == stringB.toLowerCase( ));
}
trace(caseInsensitiveCompare("Colin", "colin")); // Displays: trueString.toUpperCase( ); Section 4.6.8.2, "The toLowerCase( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| String.toUpperCase( ) Method | generate an uppercase version of a string |
Flash 5
string.toUpperCase()
The uppercase (a.k.a. ALL CAPS) equivalent of string as a new string. Characters without an uppercase equivalent are left unchanged.
The toUpperCase( ) method creates a new, uppercase version of string ; it can be used for formatting or to facilitate case-insensitive character comparisons. The toUpperCase( ) method converts only characters in the range a-z (it does not convert characters with diacritical marks such as accents and umlauts).
Note that toUpperCase( ) does not modify string ; it returns a completely new string.
"listen to me".toUpperCase( ); // Yields the string "LISTEN TO ME" var msg1 = "Your Final Score: 234"; var msg2 = msg1.toUpperCase( ); // Set msg2 to "YOUR FINAL SCORE: 234"
String.toLowerCase( ) ; Section 4.6.8.1, "The toUpperCase( ) function" in Chapter 4, "Primitive Datatypes"
| targetPath( ) Global Function | the absolute path to a movie or movie clip |
Flash 5
targetPath (movieClip)
A reference to a movie clip object.
A string representing the path to movieClip in absolute terms, using dot notation (e.g., "_level0.myMovie").
The targetPath( ) function returns a movie clip's reference as a string that describes the absolute path to the clip (identical to the return value of MovieClip.valueOf( ) ). The targetPath( ) function is sometimes used to compose placement-sensitive code that operates on a movie clip relative to the timeline upon which the clip resides.
Note that the example code given for targetPath( ) in the Flash 5 ActionScript Dictionary does not represent the proper usage of targetPath( ); contrary to what the example implies, it is not a synonym for tellTarget( ).
If square is a movie clip contained by shapes, which resides on the main timeline of level 0, then inside the shapes clip, the statement:
targetPath(square);
would return:
"_level0.shapes.square"
MovieClip._target, MovieClip.valueOf( ); Section 13.5.6.6, "The targetPath( ) function" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| tellTarget( ) Global Function | execute statements in the scope of a remote movie clip |
Flash 3 and Flash 4; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of object-oriented syntax or the with statement
tellTarget (target) {
statements
}A string or reference indicating the path to a movie or movie clip instance (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
The statements to be executed in the scope of target.
In Flash 3 and Flash 4, tellTarget( ) was the primary means of communicating between two movie clips (i.e., controlling one from the other). It was used to invoke functions such as play( ), stop( ), and gotoAndStop( ) on remote movie clips. In Flash 4, when variables were added to ActionScript, we could also use tellTarget( ) to get and set remote clip variable values. In Flash 5, these endeavors are better accomplished with the dot operator, ., and the array access operator, []. Another alternative to the tellTarget( ) function is the with statement, described in Chapter 6, "Statements".
The tellTarget( ) function may be better described as a statement because it requires a substatement block. The point, however, is academic, as tellTarget( ) has been deprecated.
tellTarget ("ball") {
gotoAndStop("redStripes");
_x += 300;
}Section 6.3.9, "The with Statement"" in Chapter 6, "Statements"; Section 13.5.7, "Whither Tell Target?" and Section 13.1, "The "Objectness" of Movie Clips" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| toggleHighQuality( ) Global Function | change the rendering quality of the Player |
Flash 2 and later; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of _quality
toggleHighQuality()
Switches between High quality and Low quality rendering. When set to High, the Flash Player renders lines with antialiased (smooth) edges. When set to Low, the Flash Player renders lines with aliased (jagged) edges. The toggleHighQuality( ) function does not take any arguments; it simply switches between the two possible settings -- "High" and "Low". This is problematic because it doesn't explicitly set the quality to a known setting, nor does it allow for more than two different possible quality settings.
As of Flash 5, toggleHighQuality( ) has been deprecated in favor of the global _quality property, which supports Low, Medium, High, and Best rendering settings.
_highquality, _quality
| trace( ) Global Function | display a value in the Output window |
Flash 4 and later
trace(value)
The expression to be resolved and then displayed in the Output window. If the resolved value of value is not a string, it is converted to a string before being sent to the Output window, according to the rules described in Table 3-2.
The trace( ) function is a debugging tool used only within the Test Movie mode of the Flash authoring environment. Though unassuming in nature, trace( ) is actually one of the fundamental components of ActionScript programming; it allows us to check the value of a variable or expression at any point during the playback of a movie.
Unfortunately trace( ) can be quite slow. Turn
off tracing under File Publish Settings Flash using the
Omit Trace Actions option.
trace(firstName); // Output the value of firstName
trace(myClip); // Output the path to myClip
trace(myClip._x) // Output the x coordinate of myClip
trace("hello" + " there"); // Resolve then output the expression| unescape( ) Global Function | decode an escaped string |
Flash 5
unescape(stringExpression)
A string (or expression that resolves to a string) that was previously encoded via escape( ).
A new string that is a decoded version of string.
The unescape( ) function returns a new string based on string. The new string contains equivalent Latin 1 characters for every occurrence of a two-digit hexadecimal escape sequence prefixed with % in string. The escape( ) and unescape( ) functions are used to encode and decode strings for safe transfer over a network. However, manual use of unescape( ) is rarely necessary as Flash automatically converts URL-encoded text when it is imported via loadVariables( ).
var msg = "hello!"; // Set msgCoded to "hello%21" msgCoded = escape(msg); // Set msgDecoded to "hello!" var msgDecoded = unescape(msgCoded);
escape( ); Appendix B, "Latin 1 Character Repertoire and Keycodes"
| unloadMovie( ) Global Function | remove a movie or movie clip from the Player |
Flash 4 and later (Flash 5's unloadMovie( ) function corresponds to Flash 4's Unload Movie with a target path)
unloadMovie(target)
A string or reference indicating the path to the movie clip or document level to remove from the Player (references are converted to paths when used in a string context).
The unloadMovie( ) function is most often used to delete movies from document levels in the Player. For example, if a movie is loaded onto level 1 in the Player, we may remove that movie from the Player as follows:
unloadMovie("_level1");The unloadMovie( ) function can also be used on movie clip instances, in which case it removes the content of the instance but not the instance itself. The instance is left on stage as an empty shell; we may load subsequent movies into that shell. Hence, a single clip can act as a container for dynamic content that is managed through successive loadMovie( ) and unloadMovie( ) executions.
loadMovie( ), MovieClip.unloadMovie( ), unloadMovieNum( ); Section 13.6, "Removing Clip Instances and Main Movies" and Section 13.8.3.1, "Method versus global function overlap issues" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| unloadMovieNum( ) Global Function | remove a movie from a document level |
Flash 3 and later (Flash 5's unloadMovieNum( ) function corresponds to Flash 3's unload Movie, which worked only with numbered levels)
unloadMovieNum(level)
A non-negative integer or an expression that yields a non-negative integer, indicating the document level to unload.
The unloadMovieNum( ) function is nearly identical to unloadMovie( ) except that it requires the target level of the load operation to be specified as a number rather than as a string. This means that unloadMovieNum( ) can only remove movies on document levels, not movie clips. It is normally used when we wish to dynamically assign the level of a movie to unload, as in:
var x = 3; unloadMovieNum(x);
This can also be achieved using string concatenation with the regular unloadMovie( ) function:
unloadMovie("_level" + x);loadMovieNum( ), Movieclip.unloadMovie( ), unloadMovie( ); Section 13.6, "Removing Clip Instances and Main Movies" in Chapter 13, "Movie Clips"
| updateAfterEvent( ) Global Function | render the contents of the Stage between frames |
Flash 5
updateAfterEvent()
The user-input clip event handlers (mouseMove, mouseDown, mouseUp, keyDown, and keyUp) often occur between frame renderings in the Flash Player. To force the screen to reflect visual changes that occur during a user-input clip event handler, we invoke updateAfterEvent( ) within any of those handlers. Note, however, that updateAfterEvent( ) is not an arbitrary screen-refreshing tool; it works only within the user-input clip events. Outside of onClipEvent( ) handlers, it has no effect.
The following script attached to a movie clip causes the clip to follow the mouse pointer and refreshes the screen every time the pointer moves. Because we refresh the screen every time the pointer moves, the clip following the pointer animates very smoothly:
onClipEvent (mouseMove) {
_x = _root._xmouse;
_y = _root._ymouse;
updateAfterEvent( );
}Note that the Flash 5 ActionScript Dictionary incorrectly describes the updateAfterEvent( ) function as accepting a clip event as an argument. It does not accept any arguments.
See Section 10.14, "Refreshing the Screen with updateAfterEvent" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| $version "Global" Property | the version of the Flash Player |
Flash 4 Build 11 and later; deprecated in Flash 5 in favor of get Version
_root.$version
Read-only
The $version property contains the same string as the return value of the global getVersion( ) function (operating system, followed by Player version information). The $version property was introduced midway through the life cycle of the Flash 4 Player and has been replaced by the getVersion( ) function. It is technically not a global property, but a property of the main movie timeline; from any other movie clip timeline, it must be accessed as _root.$version.
getVersion( )
| XML Class | DOM-based support for XML-structured data |
Flash 5
new XML() new XML(source)
An optional string containing well-formed XML (or HTML) data to be parsed into an XML object hierarchy.
An object whose properties store element attributes.
An array of references to a node's children.
The MIME content type to be transmitted to servers.
The document's DOCTYPE tag.
A reference to the first descendant of a node.
Determines whether to ignore whitespace nodes during XML parsing.
A reference to the last descendant of a node.
Status of a load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) operation.
A reference to the node after this node in the current level of the object hierarchy.
The name of the current node.
The type of the current node.
The value of the current node.
A reference to the immediate ancestor of a node.
A reference to the node before this node in the current level of the object hierarchy.
Error code describing the result of parsing XML source into an object hierarchy.
The document's XML declaration tag.
Add a new child node to a node.
Create a copy of a node.
Create a new element node.
Create a new text node.
Check if a node has any descendants.
Add a sibling node before a node.
Import XML source code from an external document.
Parse a string of XML source code.
Delete a node from an object hierarchy.
Send XML source code to a script.
Send XML source code to a script and receive XML source in return.
Convert an XML object to a string.
Handler executed when external XML source finishes loading.
Handler executed when external XML data has been parsed into an object hierarchy.
We use objects of the XML class to manipulate the content of an XML (or HTML) document in an object-oriented manner and to send XML-formatted data to and from Flash. Using the methods and properties of an XML object, we may build an XML-structured document (or read an existing one) and efficiently access, change, or remove the information in that document.
The source code of an XML document consists primarily of a series of elements and attributes. For example, in the following XML fragment, the elements BOOK, TITLE, AUTHOR, and PUBLISHER take the same form as well-known HTML tags, and we see that the AUTHOR element supports one attribute, SALUTATION:
<BOOK> <TITLE>ActionScript: The Definitive Guide</TITLE> <AUTHOR SALUTATION="Mr.">Colin Moock</AUTHOR> <PUBLISHER>O'Reilly</PUBLISHER> </BOOK>
From an object-oriented perspective, the content of an XML document can be treated as a hierarchy of objects in which each element and text block becomes an object node in a flowchart-like structure. Figure 20-1 shows our simple XML <BOOK> fragment represented conceptually as an XML object hierarchy.
Let's consider the structure and semantics of this sample XML object hierarchy from left to right. We start with the main XML object, shown in Figure 20-1 as DOCUMENT, which is created automatically by the XML constructor and serves as the container for our XML object hierarchy.
Moving one tier to the right in the hierarchy, we come to BOOK, which is the first element in our XML source code fragment and, in this case, also the first object node under DOCUMENT. The BOOK node is the root of our XML data structure -- every well-formed XML document must have an all-encompassing root element such as BOOK that contains every other element. Branches of an XML object hierarchy are added to the tree either by parsing XML source code or invoking node-addition methods on the objects in the hierarchy.
When a node is contained by another node, the contained node is said to be a child of the containing node, which is known as the parent. In our example, BOOK is the first child of DOCUMENT, and DOCUMENT is BOOK's parent.
As we move to the right in Figure 20-1, we see that BOOK has seven children, including four #text nodes that do not seem to be present in our original XML document. Each occurrence of whitespace between elements in XML source code is rendered as an object in an XML object hierarchy. If we look closely, we'll find whitespace -- a carriage return and a Tab character -- between BOOK and TITLE in the preceding XML fragment. This whitespace is represented by a #text node in Figure 20-1, which also shows similar whitespace nodes after the TITLE, AUTHOR, and PUBLISHER nodes.
BOOK's children are siblings of one another (i.e., they reside on the same level in the hierarchy). For example, we say that AUTHOR's next sibling is #text, and AUTHOR's previous sibling is #text. You can see how the #text nodes get in our way when we're moving from sibling to sibling in a hierarchy. We can deal with these empty whitespace nodes in one of the following ways:
By manually stripping them out of our object hierarchy (see the later examples for whitespace-stripping code)
By detecting and then sidestepping them in our code (see the nextSibling and previousSibling properties for ways of moving over nodes)
By simply removing the formatting whitespace in our XML source, ensuring whitespace nodes don't appear in the first place
By setting our XML object's ignoreWhite property to true before parsing our XML source (available as of Build 41 of the Flash 5 Player)
Finally, we move to the last tier in the hierarchy where we find that the TITLE, AUTHOR, and PUBLISHER nodes each has a single child. Each child is a text node, corresponding to the text contained by the elements TITLE, AUTHOR, and PUBLISHER. Notice that the text contained by an element in XML source code resides in a child node of that element in the corresponding object hierarchy. To access text contained by an element, we must always refer to that element's child using either firstChild.nodeValue or childNodes[0].nodeValue, which we'll consider shortly.
But what of the element attributes? Where do they appear in our XML object hierarchy? You might expect AUTHOR's SALUTATION attribute to be depicted as a child node called SALUTATION. But in practice, an attribute is not considered a child of the element that defines it, but rather a property of that element. To learn how attribute properties are accessed, see the XML.attributes entry.
Let's see how to build an XML document as a hierarchy of node objects. To create a new, blank XML object, we use the XML( ) constructor:
myDocument = new XML( );
We can then add nodes to our empty XML object by invoking methods such as appendChild( ), parseXML( ), and load( ) on the object. Alternatively, we may create an XML object from existing XML source in our script by invoking the XML constructor with the source argument:
myDocument = new XML(source);
For example:
myDocument = new XML('<P>hello world!</P>');When a source argument is supplied to the XML( ) constructor, source is parsed and converted into a new object hierarchy, which is then stored in the object returned by the constructor. (In this case, the node P is assigned as myDocument's first child and the text node with the nodeValue "hello world!" is assigned as P's first child.)
Once an XML hierarchy is created and stored in an object, we may access the information in that hierarchy using the methods and properties of the XML class. For example, suppose we want to retrieve the text "hello world!" in myDocument. Thinking in object-oriented terms, we might assume that we could access the text of P as a property of myDocument, as follows: myDocument.P. In fact, that won't work; instead of referring to nodes by name, we use the XML class's built-in properties, such as firstChild and childNodes, to access nodes. For example, to access the P node, we could use:
myDocument.firstChild // Accesses P myDocument.childNodes[0] // Also accesses P
Because firstChild returns a reference to the first child node of the specified node in the hierarchy, myDocument.firstChild returns a reference to node P. However, we want the text "hello world!" contained by P, not node P itself. As we learned earlier, the text of an element node is stored as a child of that node. Therefore, we can reference the text node (i.e., the first descendant of P), like this:
myDocument.firstChild.firstChild // Accesses the text node under P
To obtain the value of a node, we use the nodeValue property. For example, we can display the value "hello world!" in the Output window using:
trace(myDocument.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue);
Or, we can reassign the value of the text node under P using:
myDocument.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue = "goodbye cruel world";
To remove the P node altogether, add a new node, or move the text "hello world!" to another node, we invoke appropriate methods of the XML class. For example:
// Delete P
myDocument.firstChild.removeNode( );
// Make a new element named P
newElement = myDocument.createElement("P");
// Add the new element to our document
myDocument.appendChild(newElement);
// Make a new text node to attach to P
newText = myDocument.createTextNode("XML is fun");
// Attach the new text node to P
myDocument.firstChild.appendChild(newText);As you can see, working with XML-structured data in an object hierarchy is a mediated endeavor. We build, destroy, and manipulate the data by invoking methods on, and accessing properties of, objects. To learn the various tools available for working with XML data, explore the properties and methods of the XML class, which are listed next.
ActionScript manipulates XML data using the Document Object Model (DOM) standard published by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). For thorough coverage of how the DOM represents XML-structured data as an object hierarchy, consult:
For details on the language-independent specifications of the core DOM, see:
(pay particular attention to "Interface Node" under 1.2, Fundamental Interfaces). For details on how the DOM is implemented in ECMA-262, see:
http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-DOM-Level-1/ecma-script-language-binding.html
We've learned that the whitespace between any two elements in XML source code is represented by a text node in the corresponding XML object hierarchy. Prior to Build 41 of the Flash 5 Player, undesired whitespace nodes had to be manually stripped out of an XML object hierarchy. Stripping a particular kind of node is a common task in XML handling and serves as a good example of tree traversal (moving through every node in a hierarchy). Let's consider two different techniques for stripping whitespace nodes from a document.
In the first example, we'll use a classic FIFO (First In First Out) stack to add all the nodes in a tree to an array for processing. The stripWhitespaceTraverse( ) function seeds an array of node elements with theNode, which it receives as an argument. Then it enters a loop in which it removes the first node in the array, processes that node, and adds its children (if any) to the array. When the array has no more elements, all the descendants of theNode have been processed. During processing, any node that has no children is considered potential whitespace (because text nodes never have children). Each of these nodes is checked to see if:
It is a text node (as determined by its nodeType property)
It contains any characters above ASCII 32, which are not considered whitespace
Any text nodes containing only characters below ASCII 32 (i.e., only whitespace) are removed:
// Strip Whitespace Using a FIFO Stack
// Strips any whitespace nodes descending from theNode by traversing the tree
function stripWhitespaceTraverse (theNode) {
// Create a list of nodes to process
var nodeList = new Array( );
// Seed the list with the node passed to the function
nodeList[0] = theNode;
// Process descendants until there are none left to process
while (nodeList.length > 0) {
// Remove the first node from the list and assign it to currentNode
currentNode = nodeList.shift( );
// If this node has children...
if (currentNode.childNodes.length > 0) {
// ...add this node's children to the list of nodes to process
nodeList = nodeList.concat(currentNode.childNodes);
} else {
// ...otherwise, this node is the end of a branch, so check if it's a
// text node. If so, check if it contains only empty whitespace.
// nodeType 3 indicates a text node
if (currentNode.nodeType == 3) {
var i = 0;
var emptyNode = true;
for (i = 0; i < currentNode.nodeValue.length; i++) {
// A useful character is anything over 32 (space, tab,
// new line, etc. are all below).
if (currentNode.nodeValue.charCodeAt(i) > 32) {
emptyNode = false;
break;
}
}
}
// If no useful charaters were found, delete the node
if (emptyNode) {
currentNode.removeNode( );
}
}
}
}The technique shown in the preceding example is traditionally very efficient. However, in the Flash 5 Player, the Array.concat( ) method executes quite slowly. Hence, it's quicker to strip whitespace using the technique shown in the following example. Study the comments carefully:
// Strip Whitespace Using Function Recursion
// Strips whitespace nodes from an XML document
// by passing twice through each level in the tree
function stripWhitespaceDoublePass(theNode) {
// Loop through all the children of theNode
for (var i = 0; i < theNode.childNodes.length; i++) {
// If the current node is a text node...
if (theNode.childNodes[i].nodeType == 3) {
// ...check for any useful characters in the node
var j = 0;
var emptyNode = true;
for (j = 0;j < theNode.childNodes[i].nodeValue.length; j++) {
// A useful character is anything over 32 (space, tab,
// new line, etc. are all below)
if (theNode.childNodes[i].nodeValue.charCodeAt(j) > 32) {
emptyNode = false;
break;
}
}
// If no useful charaters were found, delete the node
if (emptyNode) {
theNode.childNodes[i].removeNode( );
}
}
}
// Now that all the whitespace nodes have been removed from theNode,
// call stripWhitespaceDoublePass() recursively on its remaining children.
for (var k = 0; k < theNode.childNodes.length; k++) {
stripWhitespaceDoublePass(theNode.childNodes[k]);
}
}The XMLnode class, The XMLSocket class; Section 18.5, "HTML Support" in Chapter 18, "On-Screen Text Fields"
| XML.appendChild( ) Method | add a new child node to a node, or move an existing node |
Flash 5
theNode.appendChild(childNode)
An existing XML node object.
The appendChild( ) method adds the specified childNode to theNode as theNode's last child. We can use appendChild( ) to add a new node to an existing node, to move a node within a document, or to move a node between documents. In each of these cases, childNode must be a reference to a node object that already exists.
To add a new child node to an existing node, we must first create the new child node using createElement( ), createTextNode( ), or cloneNode( ) or by parsing XML source code into an XML object. For example, in the following code, we create a new P node and a new text node. We append the text node to the P node and then append the P node and its text node child to the top node of a document:
// Create a document
myDoc = new XML('<P>paragraph 1</P>');
// Create a P node and a text node
newP = myDoc.createElement("P");
newText = myDoc.createTextNode("paragraph 2");
// Append the text node to the P node
newP.appendChild(newText);
// Append the P node (including its text child) to myDoc
myDoc.appendChild(newP);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>paragraph 1</P><P>paragraph 2</P>"To move a node within a document, specify a childNode that is a reference to an existing node in the document. In this situation, childNode indicates the old location of the node, and theNode indicates the new parent of the node. In the process of being appended to theNode, childNode is removed from its previous parent node. For example, here we move the B node from its parent P node to the root of the document:
// Create a new document
myDoc = new XML('<P>paragraph 1<B>bold text</B></P>');
// Store a reference to the B node
boldText = myDoc.firstChild.childNodes[1];
// Append the B node to the root of the document, while removing it from P
myDoc.appendChild(boldText);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>paragraph 1</P><B>bold text</B>"We also could have skipped the reference-storing step and just moved the node directly:
myDoc.appendChild(myDoc.firstChild.childNodes[1]);
To move a node between documents, childNode should be a reference to a node in the first (source) document and theNode should be a reference to a node in the second (target) document. For example, here we move the B node from myDoc to myOtherDoc:
myDoc = new XML('<P>paragraph 1<B>bold text</B></P>');
myOtherDoc = new XML( );
myOtherDoc.appendChild(myDoc.firstChild.childNodes[1]);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>paragraph 1</P>"
trace(myOtherDoc); // Displays: "<B>bold text</B>"XML.createElement( ), XML.createTextNode( ), XML.cloneNodee( ), XML.insertBefore( )
| XML.attributes Property | an object whose properties store element attributes |
Flash 5
theNode.attributes.attributeIdentifier theNode.attributes[attributeNameInQuotes]
Read/write
The attributes property stores the names and values of attributes defined by theNode. For example, the ALIGN attribute of this P tag:
<P ALIGN="CENTER">this is a paragraph</P>
is accessed using theNode.attributes.ALIGN or theNode.attributes["ALIGN"]. If the P tag were the only tag in our XML source, we could access the ALIGN attribute as follows:
// Create an XML object hierarchy
myDoc = new XML('<P ALIGN="CENTER">this is a paragraph</P>');
// Access the ALIGN attribute. Displays: "CENTER"
trace(myDoc.firstChild.attributes.ALIGN);
// Set the ALIGN attribute
myDoc.firstChild.attributes.ALIGN = "LEFT";The attributes property is itself an object. We can add new properties to the attributes object, thereby adding new attributes to theNode, as follows:
// Add a CLASS attribute to the P tag myDoc.firstChild.attributes.CLASS = "INTRO"; // firstChild now represents the XML source: // <P ALIGN="CENTER" CLASS="INTRO">this is a paragraph</P>
Because attributes is not an array, it doesn't contain a length property. Instead, we can access all the attributes defined on an element using a for-in loop:
var count = 0;
for(var prop in theNode.attributes) {
trace("attribute " + prop + " has the value " + theNode.attributes[prop]);
count++;
}
trace ("The node has " + count + " attributes.");If the XML element represented by theNode has no attributes, attributes is an empty object with no properties and the preceding example would indicate zero attributes.
XML.nodeType
| XML.childNodes Property | an array of references to a node's children |
Flash 5
theNode.childNodes[n]
Read-only
The childNodes property is an array whose elements contain references to the immediate descendants of theNode. It is used to access nodes in an XML hierarchy. For example, if we create an object hierarchy as follows:
myDoc = new XML('<STUDENT><NAME>Tim</NAME><MAJOR>BIOLOGY</MAJOR></STUDENT>');We can then access the STUDENT node using:
myDoc.childNodes[0];
We can access the NAME and MAJOR nodes (which are descendants of STUDENT) using:
myDoc.childNodes[0].childNodes[0]; // NAME myDoc.childNodes[0].childNodes[1]; // MAJOR
If the hierarchy below theNode changes, childNodes is automatically updated to reflect the new structure. For example, if we deleted the MAJOR node, myDoc.childNodes[0].childNodes[1] would return undefined.
We often refer to nodes to manipulate information or rearrange a document's structure. For example, we might change a student's name or add a new student using:
// Check the name of the student
trace("The student's name is: "
+ myDoc.childNodes[0].childNodes[0].childNodes[0].nodeValue);
// Change the name of the student
myDoc.childNodes[0].childNodes[0].childNodes[0].nodeValue = "James";
// Copy the STUDENT node
newStudent = myDoc.childNodes[0].cloneNode(true);
// Add a new STUDENT node to the document
myDoc.appendChild(newStudent);Note that as a convenience, we may also use the firstChild property to refer to childNodes[0]. The following references are identical:
myDoc.childNodes[0]; myDoc.firstChild;
To iterate through all the children of a node, we can use a for statement, as follows:
for (var i = 0; i < theNode.childNodes.length; i++) {
trace("child " + i + " is " + theNode.childNodes[i].nodeName);
}However, our example traverses only the first level of theNode's hierarchy. The examples under the XML.nextSibling entry shows how to access all the nodes below theNode. If theNode has no children, theNode.childNodes.length is 0.
Remember that empty text nodes, representing the whitespace used to format XML source code, also show up in a childNode list. For example, in the following XML source, empty text nodes will be created by the whitespace after the BOOK start tag and the TITLE, AUTHOR, and PUBLISHER end tags:
<BOOK> <TITLE>ActionScript: The Definitive Guide</TITLE> <AUTHOR SALUTATION="Mr">Colin Moock</AUTHOR> <PUBLISHER>O'reilly</PUBLISHER> </BOOK>
Hence, the first child node of BOOK is an empty text node; the second child is TITLE.
XML.firstChild, XML.hasChildNodes( ), XML.lastChild, XML.nextSibling, XML.previousSibling
| XML.cloneNode( ) Method | create a copy of a node |
Flash 5
theNode.cloneNode(deep)
A Boolean indicating whether to recursively include theNode's children in the clone operation. If true, clone the entire hierarchy starting at theNode. If false, clone only theNode itself (and its attributes, if it is an element node).
A duplicate of the theNode object, optionally including its subtree.
The cloneNode( ) method creates and returns a copy of theNode, including all of theNode's attributes and values if theNode is an element node. If deep is true, the returned copy includes the entire node hierarchy descending from theNode.
We often use cloneNode( ) to create a new node based on an existing template (which saves us from generating the new node structure manually). Once we've cloned a node, we normally customize it and insert it into an existing XML document using either appendChild( ) or insertBefore( ). The following example clones the first paragraph of a document to make a sibling paragraph with the same structure:
// Create a new document
myDoc = new XML('<P>paragraph 1</P>');
// Make a clone of the first paragraph
newP = myDoc.firstChild.cloneNode(true);
// Customize the clone
newP.firstChild.nodeValue = "paragraph 2";
// Add the clone into the document
myDoc.appendChild(newP);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>paragraph 1</P><P>paragraph 2</P>"Note that the text in an element is stored in a separate child node of that element, so we must set deep to true to preserve an element's text content in a clone operation. Remember that cloneNode( ) does not insert the element it returns into the node's document -- we must do that ourselves using appendChild( ) or insertBefore( ).
XML.appendChild( ), XML.createElement( ), XML.createTextNode( ), XML.insertBefore( )
| XML.contentType Property | MIME content type for XML data sent via XML.send( ) and XML.sendAndLoad( ) |
Flash 5 Build 41 or later
XMLdoc.contentType
Read/write
The contentType property is the MIME type that is sent to a server when XML.send( ) or XML.sendAndLoad( ) is invoked. It defaults to application/x-www-urlform-encoded. The contentType property may be modified for specific XML objects, or XML.prototype.contentType may be modified to affect all XML objects.
The contentType property first appeared in Build 41 of the Flash 5 Player, before which it was not possible to set MIME type. Check contentType's validity by comparing it to undefined or using the getVersion( ) function to determine the Player version and build.
See important notes on setting MIME type under the XML.send( ) entry.
XML.send( ), XML.sendAndLoad( )
| XML.createElement( ) Method | create a new element node |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.createElement(tagName)
A case-sensitive string indicating the name of the element to create. For example, in the tag, <P ALIGN="RIGHT">, P is the tag name.
A new element node object, with no parent and no children.
The createElement( ) method is our primary means of generating new element nodes for inclusion in an XML document object hierarchy. Note that createElement( ) does not insert the element it returns into XMLdoc -- we must do that ourselves using appendChild( ) or insertBefore( ). For example, here we create and insert a new P element into a document:
myDoc = new XML( );
newP = myDoc.createElement("P");
myDoc.appendChild(newP);We can combine those steps like this:
myDoc.appendChild(myDoc.createElement("P"));XMLdoc must be an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.
The createElement( ) method cannot be used to create text nodes; use createTextNode( ) instead.
XML.appendChild( ), XML.cloneNode( ), XML.createTextNode( ), XML.insertBefore( )
| XML.createTextNode( ) Method | create a new text node |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.createTextNode(text)
A string containing the text that is to become the nodeValue of the new node.
A new text node object, with no parent and no children.
The createTextNode( ) method is our primary means of generating new text nodes for inclusion in an XML document object hierarchy. Note that createTextNode( ) does not insert the element it returns into XMLdoc -- we must do that ourselves using appendChild( ) or insertBefore( ). For example, here we create and insert a new P element into a document, and then we give that P element a text-node child:
myDoc = new XML( );
newP = myDoc.createElement("P");
myDoc.appendChild(newP);
newText = myDoc.createTextNode("This is the first paragraph");
myDoc.firstChild.appendChild(newText);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>This is the first paragraph</P>"XMLdoc must be an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.
Text nodes are normally stored as the children of element nodes, which are created using createElement( ).
XML.appendChild( ), XML.cloneNode( ), XML.createElement( ), XML.insertBefore( )
| XML.docTypeDecl Property | the document's DOCTYPE tag |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.docTypeDecl
Read/write
The docTypeDecl string property specifies the DOCTYPE tag of XMLdoc, if any exists. Otherwise, docTypeDecl is undefined . XMLdoc must be the top-level node in an XML object hierarchy (i.e., an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class).
An XML document's DOCTYPE specifies the name and location of the DTD used to validate the document. ActionScript does not perform validation of XML documents; it merely parses them. We use the DOCTYPE tag to build XML documents that may be validated externally or to identify the type of a loaded XML document.
var myXML = new XML('<?xml version="1.0"?><!DOCTYPE foo SYSTEM "bar.dtd">'
+ '<P>a short document</P>');
trace(myXML.docTypeDecl); // Displays: "<!DOCTYPE foo SYSTEM "bar.dtd">"
// Set a new DOCTYPE
myXML.docTypeDecl = '<!DOCTYPE baz SYSTEM "bam.dtd">';XML.xmlDecl
| XML.firstChild Property | a reference to the first descendant of a node |
Flash 5
theNode.firstChild
Read-only
The firstChild property is synonymous with childNodes[0]. It returns a reference to the first node object that descends from theNode. If theNode has no children, firstChild returns null.
In this XML source fragment, the firstChild of the MESSAGE node is the text node with the nodeValue "hey":
<!-- Fragment 1 --> <MESSAGE>hey</MESSAGE>
Here, the firstChild of the HOTEL node is the ROOM node:
<!-- Fragment 2 --> <HOTEL><ROOM><SIZE>Double</SIZE></ROOM></HOTEL>
When theNode is the top of the object hierarchy (i.e., refers to the XML document object), firstChild may not always be a reference to the first useful element in the document. If a document includes an XML delcaration (<?xml version="1.0"?>) and perhaps a DOCTYPE tag, there are normally whitespace nodes before the actual root element of the XML hierarchy. However, if an XML fragment has no XML declaration and no DOCTYPE, we can start processing it with the document's firstChild node, as in:
// Create a new XML fragment
myDoc = new XML('<MESSAGE><USER>gray</USER><CONTENT>hi</CONTENT></MESSAGE>');
// Store the XML fragment's first node in the variable msg
msg = myDoc.firstChild;
// Assign the text contained by the USER tag
// to a text field called userNameOutput
userNameOutput = msg.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue;It's good form, but not actually necessary, to use nodeValue to access the text contained by the USER tag. When we use a text-node object in a string context, the toString( ) method is automatically invoked on that node, and the text in the node is returned.
XML.childNodes, XML.lastChild, XML.nextSibling, XML.previousSibling
| XML.hasChildNodes( ) Method | check if a node has any descendants |
Flash 5
theNode.hasChildNodes()
A Boolean: true if theNode has any children; false if it does not.
The hasChildNodes( ) method indicates whether any node hierarchy extends from a given node. It is synonymous with the comparison expression:
theNode.childNodes.length > 0
If theNode contains no subnodes, hasChildNodes( ) returns false.
We can use hasChildNodes( ) to determine whether to operate on a node during node processing. For example, here we remove the nodes below the first child of a document until the first child has no more children:
while (myDoc.firstChild.hasChildNodes( )) {
myDoc.firstChild.firstChild.removeNode( );
}XML.childNodes
| XML.ignoreWhite Property | Determines whether to ignore whitespace nodes during XML parsing |
Flash 5 Build 41 or later
XMLdoc.ignoreWhite
Read/write
The ignoreWhite property stores a Boolean that dictates whether to discard text nodes containing only whitespace during the parsing process. The default value is false (don't throw away whitespace nodes). This is a global setting that applies to an entire XML document, not just a specific node. That is, instances of the XMLnode class do not support ignoreWhite.
To cause a single XML document to discard whitespace nodes during parsing, use:
myXML.ignoreWhite = true;
To cause all XML documents to discard whitespace nodes, use:
XML.prototype.ignoreWhite = true;
The ignoreWhite property should be set before any attempt at parsing XML occurs (typically due to a load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) operation).
See the examples under the XML Class entry for manual whitespace-stripping code
| XML.insertBefore( ) Method | give a node a new previous sibling |
Flash 5
theNode.insertBefore(newChild, beforeChild)
An existing XML node object.
The child of theNode before which newChild should be inserted.
The insertBefore( ) method adds newChild to theNode's child list, before beforeChild . The insertBefore( ) method is similar to appendChild( ) but lets us precisely position a new node in an existing XML object hierarchy.
// Create a document
myDoc = new XML('<P>paragraph 2</P>');
// Create a P node and a text node
newP = myDoc.createElement("P");
newText = myDoc.createTextNode("paragraph 1");
// Append the text node to the P node
newP.appendChild(newText);
// Insert the new P node (including its text child) before the existing P
myDoc.insertBefore(newP, myDoc.firstChild);
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>paragraph 1</P><P>paragraph 2</P>"XML.appendChild( )
| XML.lastChild Property | a reference to the last descendant of a node |
Flash 5
theNode.lastChild
Read-only
The lastChild property is synonymous with childNodes[childNodes.length-1]. It returns a reference to the last node object that descends from theNode. If theNode has no children, lastChild returns null.
In the following XML source fragment, the lastChild of the MESSAGE node is the CONTENT node:
<MESSAGE><USER>gray</USER><CONTENT>hi</CONTENT></MESSAGE>
// Create a new XML document
myDoc = new XML('<MESSAGE><USER>gray</USER><CONTENT>hi</CONTENT></MESSAGE>');
// Sets msg to "hi" because myDoc's firstChild
// is MESSAGE, MESSAGE's lastChild is CONTENT, and CONTENT's firstChild
// is the text node with the value "hi"
msg = myDoc.firstChild.lastChild.firstChild.nodeValueXML.childNodes, XML.firstChild, XML.nextSibling, XML.previousSibling
| XML.load( ) Method | import XML source code from an external document |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.load(URL)
A string specifying the location of the XML document to load.
The load( ) method imports an external XML document, parses it, converts it into an XML object hierarchy, and places that hierarchy into XMLdoc. Any previous contents of XMLdoc are replaced by the newly loaded XML content.
XMLdoc must be an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.
Before accessing content imported with load( ), we must be sure the load and parsing operations are complete. To do so, either check the value of the XML document's loaded property, or assign the document an onLoad( ) callback handler to respond to the load completion. See the XML.loaded and XML.onLoad( ) entries for details. To determine whether the loaded data was successfully parsed, check the document's status property.
XML.load( ) is subject to the domain-based security restrictions described in Table 20-8 under the global loadVariables( ) function.
myDoc = new XML( );
myDoc.load("myData.xml");XML.loaded, XML.onLoad( ), XML.sendAndLoad( ), XML.status
| XML.loaded Property | status of a load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) operation |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.loaded
Read-only
The loaded property returns a Boolean value indicating whether a previously invoked load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) operation on XMLdoc has completed. It is immediately set to false when an XML load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) operation is initiated. If the load is successful, loaded is later set to true. If no such operation has ever been executed on XMLdoc, loaded is undefined.
When loaded is false, the download and parsing of XML data is still in progress, and attempts to access the object hierarchy in XMLdoc will fail. When loaded is true, XML data has finished being downloaded, parsed, and stored in XMLdoc as an object hierarchy. Note, however, that the loaded XML data may not have been parsed successfully (use XMLdoc.status to determine whether it was).
XMLdoc must be an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.
The following example shows a basic XML preloader that waits for the XML data to be loaded before displaying it (XML preloaders may also be built using an XML.onLoad( ) handler):
// CODE ON FRAME 1
// Create a new XML document
myDoc = new XML( );
// Load an external XML file into the document
myDoc.load("userProfile.xml");
// CODE ON FRAME 5
// Check if the data has loaded. If so, go to the display frame.
// If not, loop back to frame 4 and then play.
// Loop until the data is done loading...
if (myDoc.loaded) {
if (myDoc.status == 0) {
gotoAndStop("displayData");
} else {
gotoAndStop("loadingError");
}
} else {
gotoAndPlay(4);
}XML.load( ), XML.onLoad( ), XML.sendAndLoad( )
| XML.nextSibling Property | a reference to the node after this node |
Flash 5
theNode.nextSibling
Read-only
The nextSibling property returns the node object after theNode in the current level of the XML object hierarchy. If there is no node after theNode, nextSibling returns null. In the following XML source fragment, the CONTENT node is the nextSibling of the USER node:
<MESSAGE><USER>gray</USER><CONTENT>hi</CONTENT></MESSAGE>
The nextSibling property is typically used to traverse (move through) an XML object hierarchy. For example, to view all the children of theNode in the order they appear, we may use:
for (var child = theNode.firstChild; child != null; child = child.nextSibling) {
trace("found node: " + child.nodeName);
}By extending our loop into a function, we can recursively traverse every node in an XML object hierarchy, as follows:
function showNodes (node) {
trace(node.nodeName + ": " + node.nodeValue);
for (var child = node.firstChild; child != null; child = child.nextSibling) {
showNodes(child);
}
}
// Invoke the function on our node or document
showNodes(myDoc);Note that in both traversal examples shown, text nodes show up without a name as described under the nodeName entry.
XML.childNodes, XML.firstChild, XML.lastChild, XML.nodeName, XML.nodeValue, XML.previousSibling
| XML.nodeName Property | the name of the current node |
Flash 5
theNode.nodeName
Read/write
The nodeName string property reflects the name of theNode. Since only two node types are supported by ActionScript (element nodes and text nodes), nodeName has only two possible values:
If theNode is an element node, nodeName is a string matching the tag name of that element. For example, if theNode represents the element <BOOK>, then theNode.nodeName is "BOOK".
If theNode is a text node, nodeName is null. Note that this diverges from the DOM specification, which stipulates that nodeName for a text node should be the string "#text". If you prefer, you can use the DOM-compliant nodeType property instead.
We can use nodeName to check whether the current node is the type of element we're seeking. For example, here we extract all the content of H1 tags on the first level of an XML document (this example checks only for tags named H1, not for tags named h1 with a lowercase h):
myDoc = new XML('<H1>first heading</H1><P>content</P>' +
'<H1>second heading</H1><P>content</P>');
for (i = 0; i < myDoc.childNodes.length; i++) {
if (myDoc.childNodes[i].nodeName == "H1") {
trace(myDoc.childNodes[i].firstChild.nodeValue);
}
}XML.nodeType, XML.nodeValue
| XML.nodeType Property | the type of the current node |
Flash 5
theNode.nodeType
Read-only
The nodeType is an integer property that returns theNode's type. Since only two node types are supported by ActionScript -- element nodes and text nodes -- nodeName has only two possible values: 1, if the node is an element node; and 3, if the node is a text node. These values may seem arbitrary, but they are actually the appropriate values as stipulated by the DOM. For reference, the other node types in the DOM are listed in Table 20-13.
|
Node Description |
Node Type Code |
|---|---|
|
1 |
|
|
2 |
|
|
3 |
|
|
4 |
|
|
5 |
|
|
6 |
|
|
7 |
|
|
8 |
|
|
9 |
|
|
10 |
|
|
11 |
|
|
12 |
*Supported by Flash. Technically, ActionScript implements so-called attribute, document, and document_type nodes in addition to element and text nodes, but we don't have direct access to them as objects. For example, we may manipulate the attributes of a node through the attributes property, but we do not have direct access to attribute nodes themselves. Similarly, we have access to the DOCTYPE tag of a document through the docTypeDecl property, but we do not have direct access to document_type itself.
Element nodes correspond to XML or HTML tags. For example, in the XML fragment <P>what is your favorite color?</P>, the P tag would be represented in an XML object hierarchy as an element node (nodeType 1). The text contained by a tag in XML source code -- for example, the text "what is your favorite color?" -- would be represented as a text node (nodeType 3).
We can conditionally operate on a node based on its nodeType. For example, here we remove all the empty text nodes that are children of theNode :
// Loop through all children of theNode
for (i = 0; i < theNode.childNodes.length; i++) {
// If the current node is a text node...
if (theNode.childNodes[i].nodeType == 3) {
// Check for any useful characters in the node
var j = 0;
var emptyNode = true;
for (j = 0; j < theNode.childNodes[i].nodeValue.length; j++) {
// Useful character codes start above ASCII 32
if (theNode.childNodes[i].nodeValue.charCodeAt(j) > 32) {
emptyNode = false;
break;
}
}
// No useful charaters were found, so delete the node
theNode.childNodes[i].removeNode( );
}
}The XML Class, XML.nodeName, XML.nodeValue
| XML.nodeValue Property | the value of the current node |
Flash 5
theNode.nodeValue
Read/write
The nodeValue property reflects the string value of theNode. Since only two node types (element nodes and text nodes) are supported by ActionScript, nodeValue has only two possible values:
If theNode is an element node, nodeValue is null.
If theNode is a text node, nodeValue is the text contained by the node.
In practice, nodeValue is normally used only with text nodes. To assign new text to an existing text node, we use nodeValue as follows:
// Create a new XML document
myDoc = new XML('<H1>first heading</H1><P>content</P>');
// Change the text contained by the H1 tag
myDoc.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue = "My Life Story";Although we may explicitly retrieve the value of a text node using nodeValue, the toString( ) method implicitly returns a node's value when it is used in a string context. Therefore, this code displays the text node's text in the Output window:
trace(myDoc.firstChild.firstChild);
XML.nodeName, XML.nodeType
| XML.onData( ) Event Handler | executed when external XML source code finishes loading, but has not yet been parsed |
Flash 5 (undocumented)
XMLdoc.onData(src);
A string containing the loaded XML source code.
The onData( ) handler executes automatically whenever raw XML source has finished loading into XMLdoc due to an earlier load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) invocation. By default, onData( ) has the following behavior:
If the raw source received is undefined, it calls XMLdoc.onLoad( ) with the success parameter set to false.
Otherwise, it parses the source into XMLdoc, sets XMLdoc.loaded to true, and calls XMLdoc.onLoad( ) with the success parameter set to true.
The onData( ) handler may be assigned a custom callback function to intercept raw XML source code before ActionScript has a chance to parse it. Under certain circumstances, manipulating raw XML source manually may offer improved performance over ActionScript's built-in parsing.
The following example shows how to display raw loaded XML source while preventing it from being parsed by ActionScript:
myDoc = new XML();
myDoc.onData = function (src) {
trace("Here's the source: \n" + src);
};
myDoc.load("book.xml");XML.onLoad( )
| XML.onLoad( ) Event Handler | executed when external XML data has been loaded and parsed |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.onLoad(success)
A Boolean value indicating whether loading was successful (true) or failed (false).
The onLoad( ) handler of XMLdoc is automatically executed whenever an external XML file is loaded into XMLdoc via the load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) methods. By default, the onLoad( ) handler of an XML document object is an empty function. To use onLoad( ), we assign it a callback handler (i.e., a custom-made function). For example:
myDoc = new XML( );
myDoc.onLoad = handleLoad;
function handleLoad (success) {
// Process XML as desired here...
}We rely on onLoad( ) events to tell us when it's safe to process XMLdoc. If onLoad( ) is triggered, we know that the loading and parsing of external XML data have completed, so we may safely access that loaded content. The onLoad( ) handler, hence, alleviates the need to write preloading code to wait for data to arrive after the invocation of an XML load( ) function. For example, in the following code we load an XML document, and then we wait for our custom handleLoad( ) function to be automatically executed when loading completes. If loading was successful, we process our XML content with the display( ) function. Otherwise, we show an error message by executing the display( ) function. (The displayProduct( ) and displayError( ) functions are custom functions that you've presumably written to display information to the user, but they are not shown.)Here is the code:
myDoc = new XML( );
myDoc.onLoad = handleLoad;
myDoc.load("productInfo.xml");
function handleLoad(success) {
if (success) {
output = "Product information received";
displayProduct( ); // Call custom display function
} else {
output = "Attempt to load XML data failed";
displayError( ); // Call custom display function
}
}Notice that the value of the success argument of handleLoad( ) is automatically set by the interpreter to either true or false, indicating whether or not loading completed properly. However, the success argument may appear more useful in theory than it turns out to be in practice. Most web server error messages (e.g., "404 File Not Found") come in the form of HTML documents. Since HTML can quite happily be parsed as XML data, the reception of a server error page results in the parsing of that page into the target XML document object. Because the page parses properly, the load attempt is considered "successful," and success is true, even though the actual XML file may not have been found or some other server error may have been encountered. To be positive that you have the real data you requested, test its structure or content explicitly for some identifying characteristic, such as the nodeName of a particular child. See also the XML.onData( ) event handler, which can be used to perform custom parsing.
XML.load( ), XML.onData( ), XML.sendAndLoad( )
| XML.parentNode Property | a reference to the immediate ancestor of a node |
Flash 5
theNode.parentNode
Read-only
The parentNode property returns a reference to the node object from which theNode descends in the XML object hierarchy. If theNode is the top of the current hierarchy, parentNode returns null.
In this XML source fragment, the MESSAGE node is the parentNode of text node "hey":
<MESSAGE>hey</MESSAGE>
Here the parentNode of the ROOM node is the HOTEL node:
<HOTEL><ROOM><SIZE>Double</SIZE></ROOM></HOTEL>
XML.childNodes, XML.firstChild, XML.lastChild, XML.previousSibling
| XML.parseXML( ) Method | parse a string of XML source code |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.parseXML(string)
A string of XML source code.
The parseXML( ) method is akin to an internal load( ) function; it reads and parses the XML source contained by string, converts that XML into an object hierarchy, and then places the resulting hierarchy into XMLdoc. Any previous contents of XMLdoc are replaced by the new hierarchy. XMLdoc must be an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.
To include raw HTML or XML source code in a text node without parsing it, use a CDATA section as follows:
<![CDATA[ source ]]>
For example, the following code creates a MESSAGE element with a single child text node containing the text "<B>Welcome</B> to my site" (the <B> tag is not interpreted as an XML tag and does not become part of the XML object hierarchy):
myDoc = new XML( );
myDoc.parseXML("<MESSAGE><![CDATA[<B>Welcome</B> to my site]]></MESSAGE>");
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<MESSAGE><B>Welcome</B> to my site</MESSAGE>"We can use parseXML( ) as a means of replacing the current object hierarchy in an XML object with a new hierarchy based on internally composed XML source code (for example, some user input). In the following example, we create a simple XML message by combining markup with input from text fields named username and content:
myDoc = new XML( );
myXMLsource = "<MESSAGE><USER>" + username + "</USER><CONTENT>"
+ content + "</CONTENT></MESSAGE>";
myDoc.parseXML(myXMLsource);XML.load( ), XML.status
| XML.previousSibling Property | a reference to the node before this node |
Flash 5
theNode.previousSibling
Read-only
The previousSibling property returns a reference to the node object preceding theNode in the current level of the XML object hierarchy. If there is no node before theNode in the current level of the hierarchy, it returns null.
In the following XML source fragment, the previousSibling of the CONTENT node is the USER node:
<MESSAGE><USER>gray</USER><CONTENT>hi</CONTENT></MESSAGE>
The previousSibling property can be used to traverse an XML object hierarchy, although nextSibling is more commonly used for this purpose. To view all the children of theNode in reverse order, we may use:
for (var i = theNode.lastChild; i != null; i = i.previousSibling) {
trace("found node: " + i.nodeName);
}XML.childNodes, XML.firstChild, XML.lastChild, XML.nextSibling, XML.nodeName, XML.nodeValue, XML.parentNode
| XML.removeNode( ) Method | delete a node from an XML object hierarchy |
Flash 5
theNode.removeNode()
The removeNode( ) method deletes theNode from an XML document. All descendants (children, grandchildren, and so on) of theNode are also deleted. The childNodes property of theNode's parent is automatically updated to reflect the new structure of the remaining object hierarchy.
Here we delete the second child node; the third child node takes its place:
myDoc = new XML("<P>one</P><P>two</P><P>three</P>");
myDoc.childNodes[1].removeNode( );
trace(myDoc); // Displays: "<P>one</P><P>three</P>"XML.appendChild( )
| XML.send( ) Method | send XML source code to a script |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.send(URL, window)
A string specifying the location of a script or application to which XMLdoc should be sent.
A required string, specifying the name of the browser window or frame into which to load the script's response. May be a custom name or one of the four presets: "_blank", "_ parent", "_self", or "_top". For details, see the description of the window settings under the global getURL( ) function.
The send( ) method converts XMLdoc into a string of XML source code and sends that code in an HTTP request to the script or application residing at URL. The script or application is expected to process the XML in some way and optionally return a response -- normally a web page -- to the browser, which displays it in window. Note that the response is not caught by Flash but by the browser; use sendAndLoad( ) to catch the response within Flash.
When XML.send( ) is invoked from the Flash Player running in a browser, XMLdoc is sent via the POST method. When XML.send( ) is invoked from the Flash Player running as a standalone application, XMLdoc is sent via the GET method. The server application receiving the posted XML string must be able to access the raw POST data of the HTTP request directly and should not attempt to parse it as normal name/value pairs. In Perl, the data in a POST request is available from STDIN, and may be extracted and stored in, say, $buffer as follows:
read(STDIN,$buffer,$ENV{'CONTENT_LENGTH'});In ASP, raw POST data may be accessed via the Request.BinaryRead method. Some applications (e.g., Cold Fusion) may not have a direct means of accessing the data in a POST request. For these situations, it may be necessary to first convert the XML object to a string using XML.toString( ) and then pass that string to the server as a variable using loadVariables( ).
The default MIME content type of the XML text sent to the server is application/x-www-urlform-encoded. This type, however, is only cosmetic -- the text itself is not URL-encoded. In Build 41 and later of the Flash 5 Player, the MIME content type can be modified using the XML.contentType property. For example, to set the MIME type to application/xml, we use:
myXML = new XML( ); myXML.contentType = "application/xml";
Nevertheless, setting the contentType property explicitly to application/x-www-urlform-encoded still does not cause the text sent to be URL-encoded.
Note that as of Build 41 of the Flash 5 Player, when XML source is parsed and the characters &, ', ", <, and > appear in a text node, they are converted to the following entities: &, ', ", >, <. This conversion is transparent in Flash because the entities are converted back to their original characters when an XML object is converted to a string; however, the entities will show up in XML source sent to the server.
myDoc = new XML("<SEARCH_TERM>tutorials</SEARCH_TERM>");
myDoc.send("http://www.domain.com/cgi-bin/lookup.cgi", "remoteWin");XML.sendAndLoad( ), XML.load( ), XML.loaded, XML.onLoad( ), XML.status
| XML.sendAndLoad( ) Method | send XML source code to a script, and receive XML source in return |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.sendAndLoad(URL, resultXML)
A string specifying the location of a script or application to which XMLdoc should be sent.
A reference to an XML document object that will receive the returned XML source code.
The sendAndLoad( ) method serializes XMLdoc into a string of XML source code and sends that code to a script or application that resides at URL. The script or application is expected to process the XML in some way and send an XML document back as a response. The response document is caught by Flash, parsed, converted into an XML object hierarchy, and placed in resultXML. Any previous contents of resultXML are replaced by the newly loaded XML content. See XML.send( ) for important information about sending XML to a server.
Before accessing content imported with sendAndLoad( ), we must be sure that the load and parsing operations are complete. To do so, we either check the value of the resultXML's loaded property or we assign resultXML an onLoad( ) event handler to respond to the load completion. See the XML.loaded and XML.onLoad( ) entries for details. To determine the result of parsing the loaded data, we check the document's status property.
XML.sendAndLoad( ) is subject to the domain-based security restrictions described in Table 20-8 under the global loadVariables( ) function.
// Create an XML document
myDoc = new XML("<P>hello server!</P>");
// Create an empty XML document to receive the server's response
serverResponse = new XML( );
// Send myDoc to the server, and place the response in serverResponse
myDoc.sendAndLoad("http://www.domain.com/cgi-bin/readData.cgi", serverResponse);
// Add an onLoad handler to serverResponse that displays the response
// from the server in the text field output.
serverResponse.onLoad = function ( ) {
output = serverResponse.toString( );
}For a good primer on sending XML to and from a server, see Macromedia's article "Integrating XML and Flash in a Web Application," at:
XML.load( ), XML.loaded, XML.onLoad( ), XML.send( ), XML.status
| XML.status Property | indicates whether parsing XML source into an object hierarchy was successful |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.status
Read-only
The status property returns a numeric status code indicating whether any errors were encountered when parsing XML source code. Parsing occurs when source XML is:
Provided as an argument to the XML( ) constructor
Explicitly parsed via the parseXML( ) method
Loaded into a new XML object via the load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) methods
The status codes are shown in Table 20-14. If no errors were encountered in parsing, success is indicated by a status of 0. Errors are indicated by negative numbers. Parsing terminates once the first error is encountered, so other errors may surface even after you address previously reported errors.
|
Status |
Description |
|---|---|
|
0 |
The document parsed without errors (i.e., success). |
|
-2 |
A CDATA section was not properly terminated. |
|
-3 |
The XML declaration was not properly terminated. |
|
-4 |
The DOCTYPE declaration was not properly terminated. |
|
-5 |
A comment was not properly terminated. |
|
-6 |
An XML element was malformed. |
|
-7 |
Not enough memory to parse the XML source. |
|
-8 |
An attribute value was not properly terminated. |
|
-9 |
A start tag had no corresponding end tag. |
|
-10 |
An end tag had no corresponding start tag. |
We normally use status to determine whether it's safe to proceed with processing an externally loaded XML file. Check the loaded property to ensure that a load( ) or sendAndLoad( ) command has completed before checking the status. Note that ActionScript's XML parser does not validate documents against DTDs, it only verifies well-formedness.
myDoc = new XML("<BOOK>Colin Moock</AUTHOR></BOOK>");
trace(myDoc.status); // Displays: "-10" (missing start tag)XML.load( ), XML.loaded, XML.onLoad( ), XML.parseXML( ), XML.sendAndLoad( )
| XML.toString( ) Method | the source code of the XML node, as a string |
Flash 5
theNode.toString()
A string representing the source code of the XML object hierarchy starting at theNode.
The toString( ) method converts an XML node object or an XML document object to its analogous XML source code. If theNode is a top-level XML document object, any DOCTYPE and XML declaration tags are included in the string. If the document's ignoreWhite property is false, whitespace is preserved and the document source code appears as it did when it was parsed.
It's not normally necessary to invoke toString( ) explicitly; toString( ) is automatically invoked any time theNode is used in a string context.
var myDoc = new XML('<?xml version="1.0"?><!DOCTYPE foo SYSTEM "bar.dtd"><BOOK>
<TITLE>ActionScript: The Definitive Guide</TITLE>'
+ '<AUTHOR SALUTATION="Mr">Colin Moock </AUTHOR> '
+ '<PUBLISHER>O\'reilly & Associates, Inc</PUBLISHER> </BOOK>');
trace(myDoc.toString( ));
// Displays:
<?xml version="1.0"?><!DOCTYPE foo SYSTEM "bar.dtd">
<BOOK> <TITLE>ActionScript:
The Definitive Guide</TITLE><AUTHOR SALUTATION="Mr">Colin
Moock </AUTHOR> <PUBLISHER>O'reilly & Associates, Inc
</PUBLISHER> </BOOK>Object.toString( ), XML.nodeValue
| XML.xmlDecl Property | the document's XML declaration tag |
Flash 5
XMLdoc.xmlDecl
Read/write
The xmlDecl string property represents the XML declaration tag of XMLdoc, if any exists. Otherwise, xmlDecl is undefined . XMLdoc must be the top-level node in an XML object hierarchy (that is, an instance of the XML class, not the XMLnode class.)
The XML declaration tag of an XML document is used to identify the version of XML being used in the document. We use the XML declaration tag to build well-formed XML documents that may be validated externally.
// A well-formed document (but not validated against a DTD)
myXML = new XML('<?xml version="1.0"?><P>this is a short document</P>');
trace(myXML.xmlDecl); // Displays: "<?xml version="1.0"?>"
// Set a new XML declaration
myXML.xmlDecl = '<?xml version="1.0" standalone="no"?>';XML.docTypeDecl
| XMLnode Class | Internal superclass of the XML class |
Flash 5
The XMLnode class defines the core properties and methods of nodes in an XML object hierarchy. Though XMLnode is an internal device, it may be used by programmers to extend the default functionality of XML objects.
Every XML object hierarchy technically includes two kinds of object nodes:
One XML node, that serves as the main container for the hierarchy
An arbitrary number of XMLnode nodes, which are the children of the main container node
The main container node is an instance of the XML class. For example, if we create myDoc as follows:
myDoc = new XML();
then myDoc is an instance of the XML class. The XML class inherits from the XMLnode class, so main container nodes have all the properties and methods defined by XMLnode plus those defined by XML. By contrast, the children of myDoc would actually be instances of the XMLnode class, not the XML class.
So, if we create myParagraph as follows:
myParagraph = myDoc.createElement("P");then myParagraph is an instance of the XMLnode class. Most of the time the internal distinction between node classes does not affect our use of XML objects. However, if we wish to add an inherited property or method to all XML objects, then we must use the XMLnode class's prototype, not the XML class's prototype (see the example that follows). Any methods or properties attached to XMLnode.prototype are inherited by all XML nodes in a movie.
For reference, the properties, methods, and event handlers defined by XMLnode and XML are listed in Table 20-15. Note that while all listed items are accessible through instances of the XML class, items defined by XML are not available through instances of XMLnode. For example, the load( ) method may be invoked on an instance of the XML class, but not on an instance of the XMLnode class. For a full discussion of each item, see the appropriate XML class entry.
|
XMLnode and XML |
XML only |
|---|---|
|
appendChild( ) |
contentType |
|
attributes |
createElement( ) |
|
childNodes |
createTextNode( ) |
|
cloneNode( ) |
docTypeDecl |
|
firstChild |
ignoreWhite |
|
hasChildNodes( ) |
load( ) |
|
insertBefore( ) |
loaded |
|
lastChild |
onData( ) |
|
nextSibling |
onLoad( ) |
|
nodeName |
parseXML( ) |
|
nodeType |
send( ) |
|
nodeValue |
sendAndLoad( ) |
|
parentNode |
status |
|
previousSibling |
xmlDecl |
|
removeNode( ) |
|
|
toString( ) |
The following code adds a custom secondChild( ) method to XMLnode.prototype (the secondChild( ) method is subsequently available from any XML node in our movie):
XMLnode.prototype.secondChild = function () {
return this.childNodes[1];
};
myDoc = new XML("<PRODUCT>Cell Phone</PRODUCT><PRODUCT>Game Console </PRODUCT>");
trace(myDoc.secondChild()); // Displays: "<PRODUCT>Game Console</PRODUCT>"It's also perfectly legitimate to extend the XML class via XML.prototype, but such extensions apply only to main container nodes (direct instances of the XML class).
The XML Class; Section 12.5.4, "Superclasses and Subclasses" in Chapter 12, "Objects and Classes".
| XMLSocket Class | support for a continuous server/client TCP/IP connection |
Flash 5
new XMLSocket()
Terminate an open connection to a server application.
Attempt to establish a new connection to a server application.
Send an XML object hierarchy to a server application as a string.
Executes when the server terminates the connection.
Executes when a connection attempt completes.
Executes when data is received but has not yet been parsed as XML.
Executes when data has been received and parsed into an XML object hierarchy.
The majority of connections between Flash and a server have a very short life span. When Flash requests external data via the loadMovie( ), loadVariables( ), or XML.load( ) functions, a temporary communication channel is established. Data is sent over that channel and then the channel is terminated. This kind of short-term communication has many useful applications, but it is also limited in two important ways:
Once the connection closes, the server has no way of contacting Flash. Flash must always initiate communication with the server.
Each time Flash obtains information from the server, a new connection must be opened. The time and processor load involved in opening repeated connections prevents Flash from engaging in anything near real-time transactions with a server.
As of Flash 5, we can overcome these limitations with the XMLSocket class, which allows us to open a persistent communication link between a server application and Flash. We use XMLSocket to develop systems that require frequent server updates, such as a chat room or a networked multiplayer game.
In order to connect to a remote application using XMLSocket, we must first create and store an XMLSocket object, like this:
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
Then, we invoke the connect( ) method, which asks Flash to establish a communication link with the remote application. For example:
mySocket.connect("http://www.myserver.com", 8000);Once a connection is established, the XMLsocket object acts as a transmitter/receiver. We send XML-formatted data to the remote application by invoking the socket's send( ) method, and we know that we've received XML-formatted data when the socket's onXML( ) event is triggered.
A server application used with an XMLSocket object must:
Serve TCP/IP socket connections on a specific port greater than or equal to 1024
Server applications are typically created by server-side programmers, not Flash programmers. For an example of a simple server application that broadcasts all messages it receives to all connected clients, see the Java XMLSocket server available at the online Code Depot.
An XMLSocket connection stays open until one of the following occurs:
The close( ) method of the XMLSocket object is called.
No more references to the XMLSocket object exist.
The server terminates the connection (this triggers an onClose( ) event).
The movie is closed or the Flash Player exits.
Thankfully, the XMLSocket class also provides a way for us to monitor the status of our connection. It includes three properties -- onClose, onConnect, and onXML -- that allow us to define event handlers that will be triggered when the corresponding event occurs. Such handlers are typically known as callback handlers because they are triggered automatically by Flash in response to some event beyond the programmer's direct control. (In this sense they are very similar to ActionScript's built-in clip and button event handlers, except that the handler functions are programmer-defined.) For example, when a connection is closed by the server, the handler defined by the onClose property will be triggered.
TIP
If you fail to define callback handlers for the onClose and onConnect properties, you won't be able to perform any error checking or provide any feedback. If you fail to define a callback handler for your onXML property, you won't be notified when the socket receives data from a server-side application, nor will you be able to retrieve such data.
The following example shows the bare-bones code needed to implement a simple chat client. The client may be seen in action running at:
Both the server and the client are available at the online Code Depot:
// A Simple Chat Client
// *** General init
var incomingUpdated = false; // Track whether or not we need to scroll
// to the end of incoming (the main
// chat text field)
var incoming = ""; // Assign the main chat text field a starting value
// Attach the scroll manager movie. It forces the chat text field to
// show the next (most recent) line each time a message is added.
// Note that we only need the scroll manager because of a
// text field scroll bug in Build r30 of the Flash 5 Player.
attachMovie("processScroll", "processScroll", 0);
// Attach sound to play when we receive a message
var click = new Sound( );
click.attachSound("click");
// Attach sound to play when user joins or leaves
var welcomeSound = new Sound( );
welcomeSound.attachSound("welcome");
// Turn off ugly yellow highlight on buttons
_focusrect = 0;
// *** Creates a new socket and attempts to connect to the server
function connect ( ) {
// Create a new XMLSocket object
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
// Assign callback functions to mySocket's handlers.
mySocket.onConnect = handleConnect;
mySocket.onClose = handleClose;
mySocket.onXML = handleIncoming;
// Attempt to connect, and assign the return of mySocket.connect()
// to connectSuccess (connect() returns true if the initial stage
// of connection succeeds)
var connectSuccess = mySocket.connect("www.myserver.com", 1025);
if (connectSuccess) {
trace("initial connection succeeded");
} else {
// connectSuccess was false, so we didn't establish a connection.
gotoAndStop("connectionFailed");
trace("initial connection failed");
}
}
// *** Event handler to respond to the completion of a connection attempt
function handleConnect (succeeded) {
// If handleConnect()'s succeeded argument is true, the connection has been
// established and we can proceed with the chat.
// Otherwise, show a failure message.
if (succeeded) {
// Set a property noting that we have an open connection available.
mySocket.connected = true;
gotoAndStop("chat");
// Put the cursor in the "send message" text field
Selection.setFocus("_level0.outgoing");
} else {
// Connection didn't succeed so show an error message
gotoAndStop("connectionFailed");
trace("connection failed");
}
}
// *** Event handler called when server kills the connection
function handleClose ( ) {
// Tell the user that the connection was lost
incoming += ("The server has terminated the connection.\n");
// We updated the chat text field, so let the scroll manager know
incomingUpdated = true;
// Set a property noting that the connection was lost
mySocket.connected = false;
numClients = 0;
}
// *** Event handler to receive and display incoming messages
function handleIncoming (messageObj) {
// Display the received XML data in the Output window
trace("--------new data received-----------");
trace(">>" + messageObj.toString( ) + "<<");
trace("-------- end of new data -----------");
// We're updating the chat text field, so let the scroll manager know
incomingUpdated = true;
lastScrollPos = incoming.scroll;
// Check the time
var now = new Date( );
var hours = now.getHours( );
var minutes = now.getMinutes( );
var seconds = now.getSeconds( );
// Format time for output
hours = (hours < 10 ? "0" : "") + hours;
minutes = (minutes < 10 ? "0" : "") + minutes;
seconds = (seconds < 10 ? "0" : "") + seconds;
// The server sends NUMCLIENTS any time a client connects or disconnects
// If we find NUMCLIENTS in the XML object...
if (messageObj.firstChild.nodeName == "NUMCLIENTS") {
// ...then check if the incoming messages window is empty. If it is...
if (incoming == "") {
// ...then the user has just joined, so add a welcome message to the chat.
incoming += ("welcome to moock comm 1.0.0, "
+ userID + "\n"
+ " connection time: " + hours + ":" + minutes + ":" + seconds + "\n"
+ " server: clayton\'s javaComm generic flash xmlsocket server\n\n");
} else {
// Otherwise, someone has arrived or departed, so tell the user
if (parseInt(messageObj.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue) > numClients) {
// Report the client arrival in the chat window
incoming += (hours + ":" + minutes + ":"
+ seconds + " a new user has connected.\n");
} else {
// Report the client departure in the chat window
incoming += (hours + ":" + minutes + ":"
+ seconds + " a user disconnected.\n");
}
}
// Finally, keep track of the new number of clients
// and play a welcome/departure sound
numClients = parseInt(messageObj.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue;)
welcomeSound.setVolume(100);
welcomeSound.start( );
} else {
// No NUMCLIENTS node was found, so this is just a regular message.
// Grab the user name and message from our XML object.
var user = messageObj.firstChild.firstChild.nodeValue;
var message = messageObj.childNodes[1].firstChild.nodeValue;
// Add the message to the chat window, with a time stamp
incoming += (hours + ":" + minutes
+ ":" + seconds + user + ">> " + message + "\n");
// Now do the new message click.
// If it's been more than 30 secs since the last message,
// sound a loud click. Otherwise sound a quiet click.
trace("time since last message: " + (now - lastIncomingMessageTime));
if (lastIncomingMessageTime && (now - lastIncomingMessageTime) > 30000) {
click.setVolume(200);
} else {
click.setVolume(30);
}
click.start( );
}
// Truncate the contents of the main chat text
// field if it's longer than 5000 characters
if (incoming.length > 5000) {
var nearestNewline = incoming.indexOf("\n", incoming.length - 5000);
incoming = incoming.substring(nearestNewline, incoming.length);
}
// Remember when this message arrived for next time
lastIncomingMessageTime = now;
}
// *** Sends a new XML object to the server
function sendMessage( ) {
// Create the message to send as an XML source fragment.
// Note that the spaces before the <USER> and </MESSSAGE> tags
// are required so MESSAGE and USER always have a text child node.
var message = '<USER> ' + userID + '</USER><MESSAGE>'
+ outgoing + ' </MESSAGE>';
// Convert the message into an XML object hierarchy
messageObj = new XML( );
messageObj.parseXML(message);
// Check what we're sending
trace("Sending: " + messageObj);
// If a socket object has been created and is connected, send the XML message.
// Otherwise warn the user that he needs to connect first.
if (mySocket && mySocket.connected) {
mySocket.send(messageObj);
// Clear the "send message" text field
outgoing = "";
} else {
// The server must have kicked us off...
incoming += "You are no longer connected. Please reconnect.\n"
incomingUpdated = true;
}
}
// *** Closes the connection to the server
function quit( ) {
if (mySocket.connected) {
mySocket.close( );
mySocket.connected = false;
numClients = 0;
incoming = "";
gotoAndStop("login");
}
}| XMLSocket.close( ) Method | terminate an open connection to a server application |
Flash 5
socket.close()
The close( ) method severs the communication link between socket and a server application. Once close( ) has been executed on socket, subsequent attempts to invoke send( ) on socket fail. Likewise, the server application will no longer be able to send data to Flash through socket.
Note that close( ) has no effect if the socket is already closed or was never connected. Furthermore, close( ) does not trigger the onClose( ) handler of the socket object -- onClose( ) is triggered only by a server-side connection closure.
XMLSocket.connect( ), XMLSocket.onClose( )
| XMLSocket.connect( ) Method | open a connection to a server application |
Flash 5
socket.connect(host, port)
A string specifying a hostname such as "www.myserver.com" or a standard IP address (four, dot-separated, 8-bit, decimal integers such as 111.222.3.123). If null or an empty string is specified, it defaults to the server address from which the movie was served.
An integer specifying a TCP port number greater than or equal to 1024.
A Boolean indicating the initial success (true) or failure (false) of the connection attempt.
The connect( ) method attempts to establish a connection from Flash to a server application running on host at port.
If connect( ) returns true, the initial phase of the connection completed successfully and the socket's onConnect( ) handler will be invoked at a later time. From the onConnect( ) handler, we can evaluate whether the connection was fully established. Note that connection attempts can take varying amounts of time, particularly when a connection attempt fails. You should indicate to the user that a connection attempt is in progress when invoking connect( ).
If connect( ) returns false, the initial connection phase did not complete successfully. In such a case, socket's onConnect( ) handler will not be invoked.
It is important to check both the return value of the connect( ) method and, if connect( ) returns true, the value of the success parameter of the onConnect( ) handler.
For security reasons, connect( ) is not permitted to connect to arbitrary Internet hosts. It may connect only to hosts in the domain that the movie was downloaded from. The rules for connect( ) are the same ones applied to the loadVariables( ) function. See Table 20-8 under the global loadVariables( ) function for a list of the domain matching requirements imposed by the connect( ) method. The connect( ) method returns false for connection attempts that violate security restrictions. Note that security restrictions do not apply to the standalone Player.
// Create a new socket object
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
// Assign a callback handler function to onConnect
mySocket.onConnect = handleConnect;
// Attempt to connect to an application running on myserver.com at port 10000
if (mySocket.connect("myserver.com", 10000) == false) {
// Jump to a frame showing some sort of error message
gotoAndStop("failureDialog");
} else {
// Jump to a frame where we'll wait until onConnect is triggered
gotoAndPlay("connecting");
}XMLSocket.close( ), XMLSocket.onConnect( )
| XMLSocket.onClose( ) Event Handler | specifies the callback handler invoked when the server closes the connection |
Flash 5
socket.onClose = closeHandler
socket.closeHandler()
The onClose property allows you to specify a callback handler to be executed automatically whenever an open connection to socket is closed by the server. Server-instigated closures usually result from a server application shutting down or deliberately "kicking off" the client.
To respond to an onClose event, we must assign our own function (i.e., our callback handler) to the onClose property of an XMLSocket object. In practice, we use this callback handler to detect an external socket disconnection. The following code assigns the function handleClose( ) to mySocket's onClose property. The handleClose( ) function simply alerts the user that a closure has occurred by updating the value of the text field status:
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
mySocket.onClose = handleClose;
function handleClose ( ) {
status += ("\nThe server has terminated the connection.\n");
}XMLSocket.close( ); Section 10.6.2, "Attaching Event Handlers to Other Objects" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| XMLSocket.onConnect( ) Event Handler | defines the event handler invoked when a connection attempt is completed, successfully or otherwise |
Flash 5
socket.onConnect = connectHandler socket.connectHandler(success )
A Boolean indicating whether the connection attempt succeeded (true) or failed (false).
The onConnect property allows you to specify a callback handler to be executed automatically when a previously invoked connect( ) operation finishes. The execution of the callback handler specified by onConnect does not necessarily mean a connection has been successfully established -- the callback handler is executed whenever the connection attempt is finished, whether or not the attempt was successful. The callback handler specified by onConnect is passed a success argument that indicates if the attempt succeeded (i.e., a connection has been established). If so, success is set to true. If the attempt failed (i.e., a connection timed out, was refused, or otherwise could not be established), the success argument is set to false. Note that ActionScript does not distinguish among network timeout, unknown host, refusal, or other common connection errors. The callback handler, therefore, may not be executed for up to a minute after the connect( ) command is issued depending on the settings of the server involved in a connection attempt, the connection speed, network traffic, and so on.
We use the callback handler specified by onConnect to detect the success or failure of a connection attempt. In practice, we might use the callback handler to set a flag indicating that transmissions should begin if the connection was successful. We may also use the callback handler to execute fallback code when the connection fails, such as alerting the user to the problem's nature.
To respond to an onConnect event, we must assign our own function (i.e., our callback handler) to the onConnect property of an XMLSocket object. The following code assigns the function handleConnect( ) to mySocket's onConnect property. By updating the value of the text field status, handleConnect( ) alerts the user that a connection has either succeeded or failed:
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
mySocket.onConnect = handleConnect;
function handleConnect (succeeded) {
if (succeeded) {
status += ("Successfully connected.\n");
} else {
status += ("Connection attempt failed.\n");
}
}For code showing the onConnect( ) handler used in a more complete system, see the example under the XMLSocket class.
XMLSocket.connect( ); Section 10.6.2, "Attaching Event Handlers to Other Objects" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| XMLSocket.onData( ) Event Handler | executed when external data is received,but has not yet been parsed as XML |
Flash 5 (undocumented)
socket.onData(src)
A string containing loaded data, which is usually XML source code.
The onData( ) handler executes automatically whenever a zero byte (ASCII null character) is transmitted to Flash over socket. By default, onData( ) simply constructs a new XML object hierarchy from src, and passes that hierarchy to socket.onXML( ). However, the onData( ) handler may be assigned a custom callback function to intercept src before ActionScript has a chance to parse it as XML. Under certain circumstances (such as real-time video games), manipulating the raw data in src manually may offer improved performance over ActionScript's built-in XML parsing.
The following code shows how to assign a custom callback function to onData( ). The callback function simply displays any data received by mySocket and prevents ActionScript from parsing the data as XML:
mySocket = new XMLSocket();
mySocket.onData = function (src) {
trace("Received data: \n" + src);
};XMLSocket.onXML( )
| XMLSocket.onXML( ) Event Handler | defines the callback handler invoked when data is received by an XMLSocket object and has been parsed as XML |
Flash 5
socket.onXML = xmlHandler socket.xmlHandler(XMLobject )
The XML object that will house the incoming XML-formatted data.
The onXML property allows you to specify a callback handler to be executed when Flash receives an incoming transmission. Whenever socket receives a complete block of data (i.e., a string followed by an ASCII null character) from the server, the callback handler specified by socket.onXML is automatically invoked. A server may send data as often as it pleases, but the callback handler is executed only when the trailing null character (i.e., a zero byte) is received by socket. In Java, a zero byte is specified as '\0'. When the zero byte is received, it causes ActionScript to parse any data that has been received by socket since the last zero byte was sent (or since the initial connection if this is the first zero byte). The parsed data is converted to an XML object hierarchy which is passed as the XMLobject argument to the callback handler.
If you are a Flash programmer who is responsible for the client side of a client/server application only, simply note that the callback handler specified by onXML receives any new XML data when it arrives. The new XML data is accessible through XMLobject.
To access the raw data sent over a socket, override the default behavior of the socket's onData( ) handler. See XMLSocket.onData( ).
To respond to an onXML event, we must assign our own function (i.e., our callback handler) to the onXML property of an XMLSocket object. The following code assigns the function handleIncoming( ) to mySocket's onXML property. The handleIncoming( ) function accesses one of the nodes of the XML object hierarchy stored in messageObj and adds its value to the text field messages:
mySocket = new XMLSocket( );
mySocket.onXML = handleIncoming;
function handleIncoming (messageObj) {
trace("Got some new data!");
// messageObj will contain the fragment: <MESSAGE>text</MESSAGE>
var message = messageObj.firstChild.firstChild;
messages += (message.nodeValue + "\n");
}For code showing the onXML handler used in a more complete system, see the example under the XMLSocket class.
XMLSocket.send, XMLSocket.onData( ); Section 10.6.2, "Attaching Event Handlers to Other Objects" in Chapter 10, "Events and Event Handlers"
| XMLSocket.send( ) Method | transmit XML-formatted data to a server application |
Flash 5
socket.send(XMLobject)
An XML object to be converted into a string and sent to the server application or any string containing XML-formatted text.
The send( ) method transmits a message from Flash to a server application via socket. The message to send should be an object of the XML class but may also be a string. When send( ) is invoked, XMLobject is converted to a string and sent to the remote application, followed by a zero byte (the first ASCII character, null). The remote application is not obliged to respond; however, any response sent will trigger socket's onXML( ) event handler.
The following code sends a very simple XML-formatted message to a remote application over the socket mySocket, which is a valid XMLSocket object for which a connection has already been established (note that message is an XML object, not an XMLSocket object; see the example under the XMLSocket class entry for a full-fledged XMLSocket sample application):
var message = new XML('<MESSAGE>testing...testing...</MESSAGE>');
mySocket.send(message);It is also legal to send a string containing XML-formatted text without wrapping it in an XML object. For simple XML messages, this is often sufficient:
mySocket.send('<MESSAGE>testing...testing...</MESSAGE>'); |  | |
| 20.4. Entry Headings |  | IV. Appendixes |
Copyright © 2002 O'Reilly & Associates. All rights reserved.